HP STORAGEWORKS SSL1016 Reference Manual
ref ere n ce guide hp S tor age W or ks S SL1016 tape a utoloader F ourth E ditio n (June 2003) P art Number : 2 7 2 36 3-004 Th is gu id e p ro vid es st ep - by-st ep in s tru ct ion s for i n st al la t ion, a n d i s a referen c e fo r o p erati on, tr oubleshooting , a nd upgr ades.
© 2003 He wlett-P ack ard Com pany . Hewlett-P ac kar d Company mak es no w a r ranty of any kind with r egard to this materi al, including, but not limited to, the impli ed w arr anties of mer chanta bility and f itness for a partic ular purpose . Hew let t-P ackar d shall not be lia ble for err or s contained her ein or for inc idental or consequen tial damages in connectio n w ith the f urnishing, perf ormance , or use of th is m aterial. This do cument co ntains pr oprietary information, which is pr otected b y copy ri ght. No part o f this document ma y be photocopied, repr oduc ed, or translated into another lan gua ge without the prior wr itten consent of Hewlett-P ack ard. The inf ormati on contained in this document is sub ject to change w ithout notice . Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows NT® are U.S . registe r e d trade marks of Microsoft Corp oration. Or acle® is a regis tered U .S . trade mark of Or acle Cor porati on, R edwood C it y , Califor nia. UNIX® is a r egistered tr ademar k of T he Open Grou p. Solar is⢠a tr ademark of Sun Mi cr osy stems in the U .S . and other countri es. He wlett-P ack ar d Com pany shall not be liabl e f or technical or editori a l er ror s or o missions contained here in. The infor mation is pr ov ided â a s is â without w arr anty of any kind and is subj ect to change witho ut notice . The war ran ties fo r He wlett-P ack ard Com pany pr oducts ar e set f orth in the expr ess limited warr anty statements f or such products . Nothing her ein sho uld be construed as cons tituting an additional w arr anty . S SL1016 T ape A utol oader R efe rence Gu ide F ourt h Editi on (J une 2003) P art Number : 2 7 2 36 3-004
3 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide contents Contents About this Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Document Conventio ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Text Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Equipment Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Rack Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 HP Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 HP Storage Website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 HP Authorized Reseller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Mailslot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 On/Off Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Cooling Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 AC Power Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 SCSI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 9 DCA Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Internal View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Picker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 DCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Barcode Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Supported Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Content s 4 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e 2 Installation and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 SCSI Bus Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 SCSI Cable and Terminator Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 SCSI Cable Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Installation Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Required Tools and Hardware for Rack mount Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Rackmounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Removing the Autoloader From the Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Standalone Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 SCSI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Daisy Chaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 SCSI ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Sequential Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Autoloader IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 IP Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 SNMP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Time Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Set Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Set Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Lost Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 3 Tape Cartridge Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Tape Cartridges Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Tape Cartridge Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 3 Inspecting Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Protecting Tape Cartridges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Content s 5 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Transporting Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Storing Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Using the Write-Protect Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 DLT IV Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 SDLT 320 Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Ultrium Data Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 4 Autoloader Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Front Panel Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Front Panel Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Setting Passwords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Default Front Panel Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Using Data Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Inserting a Single Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Moving a Single Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Ejecting a Single Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Removing a Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Installing a Magazine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Inserting and Removing Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Manually Removing a Magazine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Changing the Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Viewing Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Autoloader Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 View Firmware Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 View Element Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 View Tape Drive Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 View Tape Drive Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 View Ethernet Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Run Inventory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Set Data Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Update Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 7 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Import/Export Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 7 Web Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Default Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Content s 6 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e View Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Move Tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Run Inventory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Set to Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Run Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Set the System Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Change the SCSI ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Set the Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Set the Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Set the Cleaning Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Set the Import/Export Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Set Ethernet Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Set Security Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Set Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Update the Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 5 Tape Drive Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Configuring the Cleaning Tap e Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Inserting the Cleaning Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 20 Storing the Cleaning Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 20 Ejecting the Cleaning Tape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 22 Tape Drive Cleaning Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Manual Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Auto Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 6 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Before Contacting Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Operational Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Understanding Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 A Regulatory Compliance Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Federal Communications Commission No tice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Class A Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Class B Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Content s 7 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo - United States only141 Canadian Notice (Avis Canadien) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Class A Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Class B Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 European Union Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 42 BSMI Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Japanese Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 B Electrostatic Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Grounding Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 C Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 7 Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Acoustic and Noise Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 49 Safety and Regulatory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 D Upgrading or Replacing the DCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Configuration and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Removing a DCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Installing a DCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Content s 8 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e
9 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide about this guide About this Guide About this Guide This reference guide provides information to help you: â Install and configure the autoloader â Properly use and maintain tape cartridges â Operate the autoloader â T roubleshoot the autoloader â Upgrade or replace Customer Replaceable Units About this Guide topics include: â Con ventions , page 1 0 â Rack Stability , page 12 â Getting Help , page 13
Abou t th is Gu ide 10 S SL1016 T ape Au toloade r Ref er ence Guide Con ventions Con ventions consist of the following: â Document Con v entions â T ext Symb ols â Equipment Symb ols Docum ent Conv entions The document co n ventions inclu ded in Ta b l e 1 apply in most ca ses. Tex t Sy m b o l s The follo wing symbols may be found in th e text of this guide. The y hav e the follo wing meanings. WA R N I N G : T e x t set off in this manner indicates that failure t o f ol lo w dir ections in th e warning co uld r esult in bodily harm or l oss of life . T able 1: Doc ument Conventions Element Convention C ro ss - re fe re n c e l i n k s Fi g u r e 1 K e y and fi eld name s, men u items, buttons, and dialog box titles Bold F il e nam es, appl ication nam es, a nd text emphasis Itali cs Use r input , comman d and dir ectory names, and sy stem r esponses ( output and messages) Monospace font COMMAND NAMES ar e upper case monospace font unless the y a r e case sensi ti ve Va r i a b l e s <monospace, italic font> W ebsite addr esses Underlined sans ser if font te xt: http: //www .hp .com
Abou t th is Gu ide S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 11 Caution: T e xt set off in this manner indi cates that f ailure t o follo w directi ons could r esult in damage to equip ment or data . Note: T e xt set off in this manner pr esen ts commen tar y , sideli ghts, or inte resting po ints of i nformat ion. Equipment S ymbols The following equipment symbols may be foun d on hardware for which this guide pertains. They ha ve the follo wing meanings. An y encl osed surface or ar ea o f the equipment mar ked w ith thes e s ymbols indi cates the p re sence of electr ic al shock ha zar ds. Enclosed ar ea contains no oper ator servicea ble parts. WA R N I N G : T o r educe the r isk of injury fr om elec tri cal shock haz ar ds, do not op en this en closur e. An y R J- 4 5 r eceptacle marked with these sy mbol s indicates a net wor k interf ace connection . WA R N I N G : T o r educe the r isk of electr ical shock , fir e , or damage to the equipment , do not plug telephone or tele com mun icat ions con nec tors into this r e ceptac l e . An y surface or ar ea of t he equipment mar ked w ith thes e sy mbols indi cates th e pre sence of a h ot surfa ce or hot comp onent . Con tact w ith this surf ace could r esult in inj ur y . WA R N I N G : T o r educe the r isk of injury fr om a hot com ponent , allow the surface t o cool befor e tou ching.
Abou t th is Gu ide 12 S SL1016 T ape Au toloade r Ref er ence Guide P ow er suppli es or s yst ems mark ed with t hese s ymbols indi cate the pr esence of m ultiple sour ces of po wer . WA R N I N G : T o r educe the r isk of injury f rom el ectri cal shock , r emov e all powe r cor ds to completel y disconn ect pow er fr om the po wer su pplie s and s y stems . An y pr od uct or assemb ly mark ed with these s ymb ols indicates th at the component e xceeds the r ecomm ended we ight f or one indiv idual to handle sa fel y . WA R N I N G : T o r educe the r isk of per sonal injury or damage to the equipment , observe local occupati ona l health and safety requir ements and guidelin es f or ma nually handling mater ial. Rack Stability Rack stability protects personal and equipment. WA R N I N G : T o r educe t he risk o f perso nal injury or damag e to the equipment , be sure that: â The lev eling jac k s ar e e x tended to the floor . â The f ull we ight of the r ack r ests on the le veling j acks. â In si ngle rac k installations, the stab i li z ing feet are attached to the ra ck. â In multiple r ack inst allations, the r ac k s ar e coupled . â Only one ra ck componen t is ext ended at an y time. A r ac k may becom e unstabl e if mor e than one r ack componen t is extended f or any r eason .
Abou t th is Gu ide S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 13 Getti ng Hel p If you still hav e a question after reading th is guide, contact an HP authorized service provider or access our website: ht tp://w ww .h p .com . HP T echnical Suppor t In North America, call tech nical support at 1-800-652-6672, a v ailable 24 hours a day , 7 d ays a week. Note: F or contin uou s quality impr o vemen t , calls may be r ecor ded or m onitor ed . Outside North America, call technical supp ort at the nearest location. T elephone numbers for worldwide technical suppor t are listed on the HP website under support: http://ww w .hp .com/sup p ort . Be sure to ha ve the follo wing information av ailable before calling: â T echnical support registration number (if applicable) â Product serial nu mbers â Product model names and nu mbers â Applicable error messages â Operating system type and re vision le vel â Detailed, specif ic questions HP Stor age W ebsite The HP website has the latest information on this product, as wel l as the latest dri vers. Access storage at: ht tp://w ww .h p .com . From this website, select the appropriate product or solution. HP Author ized R eseller For the name of your nearest HP authorized reseller: â In the United States, call 1-8 0 0-345-15 18 â In Canada, call 1-800-26 3-5868 â Else whe re, see the HP website for locations and telephone numbers: ht tp :/ /ww w . hp .co m .
Abou t th is Gu ide 14 S SL1016 T ape Au toloade r Ref er ence Guide
15 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 1 Over v iew The HP StorageW orks SSL1016 T ape Autoloa der pro vides a compact, high-capacity , low cost solution for si mple, unattended data backup. The autoloader supports one DL T1, SDL T 320, or Ultrium 460 tape dri ve and tw o remov able magazines. Each magazine can accommodate up to eight cartridges. Fro nt Vi ew The mailslot, LCD, function ke ys, status LEDs, On/Off button, and left and right magazines are visible on the front panel of the autoloa der . Figure 1: Autoload er fr o nt vie w 1 Left m agazine 5 Fu n c t io n k eys 2 Mail slo t 6 LC D 3 Stat us LE Ds 7 On/Off bu tton 4 Rig h t m a g az i n e 1 7 2 6 3 4 5
Ove r vi ew 16 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Mai ls lo t The autoloader has a manual entry port, th e mailslot, which allo ws you to load or unload a single cartridge. T o maintain security , the mailslot can be password protected. Provided that the tape dri ve is empty , a cartridge can be inserted in the mailslot e ven if both maga zines are completely f illed. LC D The LCD allo ws you to use the scrolling menu to perform diagnostics and to enter commands. Fun c t io n Key s The function ke ys allow you to mo ve th rough the scrolling menu and to make selections. Fig u re 2 : Fu nc t io n keys 1 Scr oll up . P r ess to mo ve through a menu or number ser ies. 2 Esca pe. Pre ss to retur n to the pre vi ous menu or to mov e backw ards on a scr een. 3 Scr oll dow n. Pr ess to mo ve thr ough a menu or number series . 4 Enter . Press to select an option. 1 2 3 4
Ove r vi ew 17 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Stat us LEDs The status LEDs sho w autoloader and driv e status i nformation. The left, green LED sho ws ready status information, and th e right, amber LED sho ws fault status information. On/ Off Butt on The On/Of f button is a soft ke y , which means that if the autoloader is moving an y cartridges when you press t he On/Off b utton, it f inishes moving them before po wering off. Ho we ver , any other functions, such as writing to a tape or performing a diagnostic test are interrupt ed and terminated when you press the On/Of f button. Mag az ines The magazines contain part of the robotic s that mo ve the cartridges inside the autoloader . The autoloader is equipped with two cartridge magazines. The magazines are remov able, and each magazine accommodates up to eight cartridges. The magazines store your data tape cartridges and can also store your cleaning cartridge. Fi gure 3: M agazine
Ove r vi ew 18 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Rea r Vi ew The fans and connection ports are visi ble on the back of the autoloader . Fig ure 4 : Auto lo ad er re ar view Cooling F ans The autoloader has a system cooling fan, plus a se cond fa n to cool the power supply . These fans maintain the acceptabl e temperature range for the tape dri ve path and all internal electronics. See Appendix C, âSpecif ications, â for details about required specif ications. AC P owe r Pl u g The autoloader requires a 110/ 220 v olts A C po wer connection. 1 AC p o we r p l u g 5 Swi t ch e s ( fa c t or y us e o n ly ) 2 Fa n 6 S CSI connector s 3 Man ual ma ga zine e jec t slo t 7 Man ual ma ga zine e jec t slo t 4 Ether net connect or 2 2 1 4 5 3 6 7
Ove r vi ew 19 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Ethernet Connection The ethernet connection lets you connect the autoloader to a network, enabling remote administration. V ia the network, the autoloader can access an SNMP server and a Simple Network T ime Protoc ol (SNTP) time serv er . The ethernet connection supports File T ransfer Protocol (ftp) and Hyper T ext T ransf er Protocol (http). Y ou can do wnload firmw are update s using ftp and perform administrati ve tasks, including diagnostics, using http. SCS I C on ne c ti o n The autoloader supports both lo w-voltage dif ferential (L VD) and single ended (SE) connections, ho wev er , data transfer rates and SCSI cable lengths will be reduced if an SE connection is used on an SSL1016 with an SDL T 320 dri ve. An L VD connection is recommended for the SSL1016 with an SDL T 320 dri ve. For best performance, an L VD c onnection using an Ultra3 adapter is recommended for the Ultrium 460 dri ve. A 68-pin VHDCI connector links the autoloader to the e xternal host server . A second VHDCI port is used for terminatio n or to connect another SCSI de vice. If other SCSI de vices will be sharing the bus, mak e sure that SCSI cable length limits are not exceeded and that the other devices will not impact the performance of the tape dri ve b y utilizing too much of the bandwidth. Note: Adding a SE dev ice to an L VD bus caus es the entire bus to op er ate at SE speeds and with SE cable length requir em ents. DCA S witc hes The switches on the back of the dri ve carrier assembly (DCA) hav e no user function at this time.
Ove r vi ew 20 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Internal Vie w Figure 5 sho ws the internal compon ents of the autoloader . The pick er sits behind the front panel and mailslot, and can accep t and eject cartridges from the mailslot, magazines, and tape driv e. The dri ve carrier assembly (DCA) contains the tape dri ve, internal po wer supply , controller boar d, and cooling fan; it can be removed and replaced as a single component. Figur e 5: Autoload er internal vie w 1 Pi c ke r 2 D rive ca rrier a ss em bly Pi c ke r The picker mo ves the cartridges from one location to another . One motor rotates the picker platform to position t he picker arm in front of the dri ve, mailslot, or desired magazine. Another motor positions the picker arm to retrie v e or replace the cartridge. The rotation motor en gages the arm on a notch of the cartridge, and the translation motor mov es the cartri dge from the picker to the dri ve (or magazine or mailslot) or from the dri ve (o r magazine or mailslot) to the picker . 2 1
Ove r vi ew 21 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide DCA The dri ve carrier assembly (DCA) is conf igured with one DL T1, SDL T 320, or Ultrium 460 tape dri ve, depending on the model. The DCA facilitates the easy remov al of the dri ve. T o change tape driv es, you can replace the DCA without havi ng to remove the top cov e r of the autoloader . Bar code Reader The barcode reader pro vides in ventory feed back to the host application and/or LCD panel by reading the cartridge barc ode labels. The autoloader stores the customized in ventory data in its non-volatile memory . For best performance, HP recommends usin g only HP barcode labels: â Part number C9240-67903 for DL T or SDL T cartridges â Part number C7970B for Ultrium data cartridges Supported Sof t w are The autoloader supports mo st major operatin g syste ms and is also compatible with most popular backup software applications. Note: Infor mation on specif ic su pp orted oper ating sy stems and back up appli cations can be f ound at ht tp: //w w w .hp.com and at vendor websit es.
Ove r vi ew 2 2 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide
23 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 2 Installation and Configur ation Pr eparation Make sure that the w ork area is free from conditions that could cause electrostatic dischar ge (ESD). See Appendix B, âEle ctrostatic Discharge, â for additional information. Y ou will need a #2 Phillips screwdri ver for rackmount installations. SCSI Bus R equirements The autoloader contains a SCSI interface that supports both Single Ended (SE) and Lo w V oltage Dif ferential (L VD) communi cation, ho wev er , data transfer rates and SCSI cable lengths will be reduce d if an SE connection is used. The autoloader is not compatible with a Hi gh V oltage Dif ferential (HVD) SCSI bus. The follo wing SCSI hos t adapter cards ar e currently supported on the autoloader: Note: F or best perf ormance , an L VD connection is r ecommended. T able 2: Suppor ted Adapters Adapter DL T1 SDL T 3 20 Ultrium 46 0 64-bit/66 MHz Du al Channel W ide Ultr a3 S CSI adapte r (L VD) yes ye s yes 64-bit/66 MHz Si ngle Chann el Wi de Ultr a3 S CSI adapte r (L VD) yes ye s yes 64 -b it Dual Channel W ide Ultr a2 S CSI adapte r (SE a nd L VD) yes ye s no
Installati on and Conf igur ation 2 4 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide The follo wing cables are ship ped with your autoloader: â 68-pin VHDCI connector to 68-pin VH DCI connector 3 foot (.092 meter) cable â 68-pin VHDCI connector to 68-pin VH DCI connector 6 foot (1.83 meter) cable â 68-pin VHDCI connector to 68-pin HD connector 6 foot (1.83 meter) cable SCSI Cable and T er minator Requirements If the autoloader is the last de vice on the SCSI b us you mu st attach a terminator to the SCSI connector on the back panel of the autoloader . There must be a terminator on each end of the SCSI b u s. T ypically , the host adapter provides the front-end termination. SCS I C ab l e Le ng t h L V D SCSI conf igurations ha ve a maximu m allow able bus length of 39.4 feet (12 meters). T o determine the cable length of the bus, measure the lengths of the SCSI cables connecting each device to that b us and add those lengths together for the total length. T o that total length, ad d 16 inches (40. 64 cm) for the internal SCSI cable length used in the autoloader . Accessories The follo wing accessories are sh ipped with each autoloader: â Installation poster â SCSI cable(s) â RJ-45 Ethernet cable, 10 foot (3.048 meter) â SCSI terminator â Hardware brackets and handle s to rackmount the autoloader â Standalone conf iguration hardware â Tw o m a g a z i n e s â 1 data cartridge â Po wer cord â Rackmount template
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 25 S SL1 016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide â Documentation CD (documents in PDF fo rmat) Installation Location Caution: T o pr ev ent damage to the tapes and the tape dr iv es, position the autolo ade r so that no c oo ling vents are lo cate d d irect ly in front of the un it; this helps minimi ze the amount of f or eign debr is enter ing the tape path. Choose a location that m eets the follo wing criteria: â Room temperature: 10 ºC to 35ºC (50ºF to 95ºF) â Po wer source: â A C po we r v oltage: 100 V to 1 27 V or 200 V to 240 V â Line frequency: 50 Hz to 60 Hz â Air quality: Minimal sources of particul ate contamination. A void areas near frequently used door s and walkwa ys, stack s of supplies that collect dust, and smoke f illed rooms. A void placing the au toloader near printing machi nes as airborne ink contaminates tape dri ves. Note: Ex c essi ve dust and debr is ca n damage tapes and tape dr iv es. â Humidity: 20% to 80% relati v e humidity (non-condensing) â Front Clearance: about 2 inches (about 5 cm) from rack door; about 6 inches (about 15 cm) from w all or solid object; about 12 in ches (a bout 30 cm) to insert a cartridge in the mailslot, and ab out 28 inches (about 71 cm) to insert or remov e a magaz ine.
Installati on and Conf igur ation 2 6 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Requir ed T ools and Hard war e f or Rackmount Installation Y ou need a Phillips scre wdri ver to in stall your autoloader into a rack. Make sure you have all the necessary part s you need before you beg in installation. Y ou need the follo wing parts: â 8 clip nuts, plus four additional clip nuts (included with your rack) if using the optional installation rails â 2 U-channel brackets with spring clips â 2 rear support brack ets â 8 rear support brack et screws â 8 mounting scre ws (plus fo ur additional mounting scre ws if using the optional installation rails) â Rack template Rac k mo u nt ing WA R N I N G : It takes t wo p eop le to safely rackm ount your auto load er . WA R N I N G : Bef ore y ou begin, mak e sur e that th e rac k is suffic ien tly stabl e. If pr ovi ded, low er the rack le veler f e et and make sure an y requir e d stabili z ers are installed . If pro v ided, e xtend the r ack an ti-tip dev ice . F a ilur e to e x tend t he anti-tip dev ice could r esult in per sonal injury or da mage to the t ape autolo ade r if the rack ti ps over . Caution: Do not remo ve the top cov er of the autoloader dur ing the installation process. Removing t he to p cover c ould result in dam age to the autolo ade r . I t also causes the a utoloader chassis t o bow and pr ev ents corr ect installati on. Caution: Make sur e that the r ack and all equipment m ounted in the r ack hav e a r eliable gr ound connecti on. V erify tha t the total c urr ent of the r ack components doe s not e xceed the c urr ent r ating o f the pow er distr ibution unit or outlet receptacles.
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 27 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide T o ra ckmount the autoloader: 1. Use the template that shipped with t h e library to mark the location of the clip nuts and mounting hardware on the mount ing rails of the rack. Figur e 6 : Me asuring w it h the rack template 2. Install two clip nuts into each front rail of the rack in the hole locations marked using the templat e. 3. Install two clip nuts into each back rail of the rack in the hole locations marked using the templat e. 4. If there are no devices installed be low the autoloader , use the optional installation rails to help support the aut o loader during installation: a. Install four clip nuts at the front of the rack, two on each rail. Install the f irst clip nuts two holes belo w the botto m autoloader clip nut. Install the second clips nuts two hol es below the f irst clip nuts. b . Insert one optional mounting rail into the rack with the support ledge fac ing in .
Installati on and Conf igur ation 2 8 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide c. Hook the curved tabs around the rear rail of the rack 1 . d. Align the rail so that the holes ar e over the pre viously installed clip nuts 2 . e. Secure with two screws 3 . f. Attach the other optional mount ing bracket using steps b through e. Figur e 7 : Installing the opti onal installation rails 1 2 3
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 29 S SL1 016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide 5. Attach the two support brackets to the rear of autoloader , tightening scre ws until snug. Caution: Be sur e the support br ac kets ar e aligned s trai ght wit h the sides of the aut oloader f or pr oper installati on into the U-c hannel br ack ets. Figur e 8: Attac hing the autoloader su pport brackets
Installati on and Conf igur ation 30 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 6. Attach the two rackmount handles 1 to the front of the autoloader , tightening the studs 2 until snug. Figur e 9: Attac hing the front rackmount ha ndles 1 1 2
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 31 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 7. Attach one U-channel brac ket to each rear rail of the rack, loosely installing the scre ws through the clip nuts. (Attach the side of the bracket with only two holes.) Do not tighten the scre ws. Figur e 10: At taching th e U-ch annel brack ets to t he rack 8. Position the autoloader in the rack so that each support bracket rests on a U-channel bracket. Each support bracket slides along the lip of the U-channel bracket. Figur e 11: P ositioning the autoloader in th e rack
Installati on and Conf igur ation 3 2 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 9. Slide the autoloader in place 1 so that: a. The mounting studs on the front e ars of the autoloader s lide into the holes between the clip nuts. b . The front ears of the autoload er align with the front clips. c. The rear support brackets engage th e locking tab on the rear U-channel brackets. Figur e 12 : Attaching th e autoloader to the front of the rack 10. Loosely install a scre w in each front clip nut to attach the ears 2 . 11. V erify that the autoloader is lev el. Adjust as needed. 12. T ighten the four scre ws that atta ch the ears to the front clip nuts. 13. T ighten the four scre ws that connect the U-channel brackets to the rear clip nuts. 14. Install and tighten the four screws th at connect the support brackets to the U-channel brackets. 1 2 2
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 33 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Figur e 13: Rear U-c hannel bracket scre ws 15. If additional products are going to be installed belo w the autoloader , remov e the optional installation brackets: a. Remove the tw o screws securing each bracket to the front of the rack. b . Pull the bracket forw ard and down, then push back to release the rear tabs. c. Remove the rail from the rack. Caution: T o av oid per sonal injury or damage to the equipment , be sure t h at the optional installation br ack ets or ot her pr ope rly inst alled r ack pr oduc ts are in place below the aut oloader at all tim es. Note: Be sure to sa ve the optional installati on brac kets in a safe place f or use if the aut oloader nee ds to be r emo ved.
Installati on and Conf igur ation 34 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide Remo ving the Autoloader F rom the Rack When remo ving the auto loader from the rack: â Always use at least two people. â Install the optional installa tion brackets if there is no device installed belo w the autoloader . â Before po wering off the auto loader , remo ve the magazines. Standalone Installation Use these instructions if you will not be installing your autoloader into a rack. Prepar ation T o prepare your autoloader for standalone installation: 1. Place one rear standalone leg into place and secure with two scre ws. Repe at for the other side. Figur e 14 : Installing the rear standalone leg
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 35 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 2. Install the front standalone bracket cov er: a. Place the cover o ver the autoloader bracket. b . Place the washers o ver the bracket holes and secure with a scre w . c. Repeat for the other side. Figur e 15: Installing t he front standalone bracket co vers Clear anc e Place the autoloader on a desk, table, or other stable, horizontal surface. Make sure the fan at the rear of the autoloader is not obstructed. Allo w about 6 inches (about 15 cm) from w all or solid object at the rear . Allo w about 12 inches (about 30 cm) to insert a cartridge in the mailslo t, and ab out 28 inches (about 71 cm) to insert or remo ve a magazine at the front.
Installati on and Conf igur ation 36 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide SCSI Connection The SCSI connection lets the host comp uter co mmunicate w ith the autoloader . Note: If yo u do not alr eady ha ve a com patible and a vaila ble S CSI HB A install ed in the host comp uter , install one befo re pr oceeding. Caution: When inst alling cables, be car eful not t o damage the SCS I pins on the connect ors. Damaged pins w ill cau se the connection t o fail. T o make the SCSI connection: 1. If the host computer i s connected to a network, check with the system administrator before turning of f power . 2. Properly po wer of f all peripheral devi ces connec ted to the host computer . 3. Po wer off the host computer . 4. Install the supplied 68-pin 6 foot (1.83 meter) SCSI cable to the double-stacked SCSI connector that is on the back of th e DCA and tighten the scre ws. Y ou can install the SC SI cable in either port. Note: Use an appr opri ate cable that matches y our host connector .
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 37 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Figur e 16 : Attaching t he cables Note: The connector on the end of the cable is offset . M ak e sur e that y ou in stall it with the corr ect orien tation so that y ou ca n fit a te r m inator o r another cable in the other port . 5. If the autoloader will be the last de vi ce on the SCSI bus, install the supplied SCSI terminator to the remaining port th at is on the DCA and then tighten the scre ws . 6. Attach the other end of the SCSI cable to the SCSI host adapter card using the appropriate cable. 7. Po wer on an y p eripheral devices you po wered off in Step 2. Note: Do not pow er on the host com puter at this time . Y ou must f irst conf igur e the autolo ad er .
Installati on and Conf igur ation 38 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide Dais y Chaining The autoloader do es not support daisy chaining with other products. Y ou can daisy chain one additional autoloader using the 68 -pin VHDCI connector to 68-pin VHDCI connector 3 foot (.092 meter) cable. Y ou must then install a terminator on the second autoloader . Ethernet Connection Attach one end of the RJ-45 cable to th e autoloader . Attach the other end to a 10/100 hub o r switch. Note: This step is not r equir ed for oper ation , but is necessar y if you w ant to use the aut oloader W eb admin istr ation f eature . Po w e r O n Carefully inspect your power cord and make sure that it is the correct one for your country or region. If the po wer cord is not correct, contact your customer service representati ve. T o connect the po wer cord: 1. Make sure that the power switch on the ba ck of the autoloader is of f (the 0 is pressed). 2. Connect the female end of the power co rd to the po wer connector on the back of the autoloader . 3. Plug the male end of the powe r cord into the po wer source.
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 39 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Figur e 17 : Connec ting the pow er cord Note: Do not pow er on the host befor e pow er i ng on the aut oloader . T o power on the autoloader: 1. Push the po wer switch that is on the back of the autoloader to the on position (the | is pressed). W ait while the autoloader performs its po wer-o n sequence. Du ring this time, the follo wing activities occur: â The cooling fans begin to operate. â The LCD illuminates and displays po wer-on messages. â The autoloader performs a po wer-on self-test (POST). â The autoloader performs a calibra tion and magazine element status. Note: Dep ending on how the autoloader w as last p o wer ed off , you ma y ne ed to pr es s the On/Of f button on the fr ont of the autoloade r .
Installati on and Conf igur ation 40 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Ve r i f i c a t i o n When you f irst po wer on the autoloader , it automatically runs a Power On Self T est (POST). During the POST , the right (amber) LED flashes rapidly . After the POST , the left (green) LED illuminates st eadily , and after approximately three minutes the LCD displays the HP logo an d dri ve type. Do one of the following: â If the autoloader po wers on successfully , continue co nfiguring the autoloader . See âConf iguration. â â If the autoloader does not po wer on successfully , mak e sure tha t: â The rear power switch is on. â The po wer cord is inserted correctly . â The SCSI bus is terminated. â The SCSI cable is connected to the autoloader and host computer . â The On/Off b utton on the front of the autoloader has been pressed. â There is not an error code disp layed on the autoloaderâ s LCD. (If an error message is displayed, see Chapter 6, âT roubleshooting. â) If you cannot resolve the problem yoursel f, contact your authorized service representati ve. Configuration T o configure your autoloader , use the Co nf igu ration submenu on the front pa nel. When you f irst po wer on the autoloader , it defaults to no password protection. After you set the security option, ho we ve r , all the conf iguration functionality is password-protected; yo u need an administrator-le vel password to conf ig ure the autoloader .
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 41 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide The Conf iguration submenu has the following options: Figur e 18: Configuration submenu Note: The a utol oader ships w ith English f ir mw are installed . T o inst all fir m war e in othe r languages, see âUpdate F irm war e â in Chapter 4. Configuration SCSI ID Etherne t Set IP Dynamic (DHCP) Static Set Subne t Mask Set Gateway Set SNM P Server Set Time Ser ver Time Set Timezone Set Date/Time Change Mode Random Sequential Seq Cycle Mode Cleaning Tape Auto Clean Tape Loc ation Compression Securi ty Security Set Password Operat or Administrato r System Update Mixed I / ES l o t
Installati on and Conf igur ation 4 2 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide T o configure the autoloader , you must set the following: â SCSI ID â Ethernet IP address (if you are no t using DHCP) â SNMP server IP address (for SNMP alerts) â T ime server IP address (or the timezo ne, date, and time, if conf iguring manually) Note: The DL T1 and SDL T aut oloaders do not ha ve a battery so if time is manually set , it i s lost and need s to b e reset when ev er the auto loader is p ow er cycled. â Control mode â Security option SCS I I D Each SCSI de vice attached to a server or workstation must ha ve a unique SCSI ID. For the DL T1 and SDL T autoloaders you need to set only one SCSI ID for the autoloader; you do not need to set up se parate SCSI IDs for the tape driv e and autoloader . Because the auto loader uses LUNs to address the dri v e and robotics, only the autoloader requires a SCSI ID. For the Ultrium 460 autoloader you must se t tw o SCSI IDs; one for the autoloader and one for the tape driv e. The default SCSI ID for the autoloader is 4. The default SCSI ID for the tape dri ve is 5. Check the IDs on all other SCSI de vices th at are on the SCSI bu s, including the SCSI host adapter , and sele ct an unused SCSI ID for the autoloader . The def ault ID for the autoloader is 5, b ut you ca n select any unused number between and including 0 and 15. If the factory de fault SCSI ID (5) is not already being used by another de vice on the SCSI b us, you do not need to change the autoloader SCSI ID from 5 if you do not want to. Note: Disr egar d the S CSI ID s wit ch on t he back of the DCA. T he aut oloade r does not use the switch to set the SCSI ID .
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 43 S SL101 6 T ape A utoloader Ref erence Gui de T o set the SCSI ID: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. Figur e 19: Main menu 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Conf iguration subm enu, scroll to SCSI ID. Figure 20: Se lect SCSI I D 4. Press Enter . 5. Scroll to the number you want to set as the autoloader SCSI ID. Figure 21: Se t SCSI ID 6. Press Enter . 7. Reboot for the ne w SCSI ID to take af fect. a. Press and hold the power b utton on the front panel until Po wer Of f appears on the LCD. b . Press the po wer button again to po wer on the autoloader . The new SCSI ID is no w in effect. Sta tus C omm ands î Configuration Diagnostics î SCSI I D Et hernet T ime Change Mod e î îî to c hange E nter to continue SC SI ID: 0 5
Installati on and Conf igur ation 44 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide Contr ol M ode Y ou can set the autoloader to either Ra ndom, Mix ed, Sequential, or Seq Cycle Mode. The defa ult control mode is Random. Note: If the I /E slot is enable d , the autoloader cannot b e used in Mix ed or Sequential Mode . The Sequential mode su pports certain bac kup applications that do not man age media. During backup, wh en one cartridge is read or writ ten to the end of the tape, the autoloader automatically returns that cartridge to its slot and loads the cartridge from the ne xt higher numbered slot to the tape dri ve to be read or written to. This continues until the backup softwa re stops accessing the driv e or until all the cartridges ha ve been sequentially accessed. In Random control mo de you can specify which ca rtridge you want to use and where you want it to go. Y ou will pr obably use this mode the most. In Mixe d mode, the autoloader supports bo th Sequential and Random mode functions. This mode can be useful in network en vironment. Note: Do not use Mi xed mode unless you ar e certain all applications support Mi xed mode oper ation. In Seq Cycle m ode, the autolo ader automatically starts o ver with magazine slot 1 when the last cartridge is used (slot 16 or highest filled slot). If this control mode is not set, the autoloader st ops when the last cartridge a vailable has been used. In Seq Cycle mode, the autoloader con tinues to c ycle until a user stops it. Caution: Seq C ycl e mode c oul d cau se data to be ov er wr itten . O nl y u se Seq Cyc l e m o d e i f yo u a re s u re t h a t t h e s ize a n d f re q u e n c y o f yo u r b a cku p s w i l l n o t pr e matu r ely ov er write your data.
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 45 S SL1 016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide T o set the control mode: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. Figur e 2 2 : Main menu 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Conf iguration submen u, scroll to Change Mode. F igure 2 3: Select Change Mode 4. Press Enter . The mode options appear . A checkmar k appears after the enabled m ode. F igure 2 4: M ode Opti ons 5. Do one of the following: â T o change the control mode, scro ll to the desired mode and press Enter . A checkmark appears. Press Enter again. â T o lea ve the control mo de unchanged, pre ss Escape . 6. Reboot for the new mode to tak e affect. a. Press and hold the power b utton on the front panel until Po wer Of f appears on the LCD. b . Press the po wer button again to po wer on the autoloader . The ne w control mode is no w in ef fect. St atus C omman ds î Configuration Diagnostics SC SI ID Et hernet T ime î Change Mo de Cleanin g Ta p e î î 3 Random Mixed Seque ntial Seq Cycle Mod e
Installati on and Conf igur ation 46 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide Note: When you enable the Sequential mode , L UN 1 no longer appears on th e SCS I bu s. Sequential Mode Operation If you enable the Sequential control mo de you must use the Sequen tial Ops submenu und er the Commands menu to o p erate the autoloader after it has been rebooted. â Start allo ws you to load the first cartridge. â Resume allo ws you to continue if the cycle w as stopped. â Stop stops the cycle. T o start Sequen tial Mode o peration: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Commands. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Commands submenu, scroll to Sequential Ops. 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Sequential Ops submenu, scroll to Start. 6. Press Enter . Moving first tape to drive is displayed. T o stop Sequen tial Mode operation : 1. On the main menu, scroll to Commands. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Commands submenu, scroll to Sequential Ops. 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Sequential Ops subm enu, scroll to Stop Cart. 6. Press Enter . Ejecting tape from drive is displayed. T o resume Sequential Mode operation: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Commands. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Commands submenu, scroll to Sequential Ops. 4. Press Enter .
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 47 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide 5. On the Sequential Ops su bmenu, scroll to Resume. 6. Press Enter . Ethernet Ethernet is the method the autoloader uses to access a network. W ith an Ethernet connection, you can remotely access the auto loader over the network to which it is connected. T o use the Ethernet connec tion, you must define th e following: â A dynamic or static IP address for the autoloader â A subnet mask â An IP gatew ay If you want SNMP alerts or a link to a tim e server you must def ine the follo wing: â A Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) serv er (for SNMP alerts) â A Simple Network T ime Protocol (SNTP) time serv er , or set the time and timezone manually Note: The DL T1 and SDL T aut oloaders do not ha ve a battery so if time is ma nuall y set , it i s lost and need s to b e reset when ev er the auto loader is p ow er cycled. Autoloader IP Addres s An Internet Protocol (IP) address is the addr ess of any de vice that is attached to a network. Each de vice must hav e a unique IP address. IP addresses are writte n as four sets of numbers separated b y periods ranging from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.2 55.255. IP addresses are either permanent or dy namically assigned. A permanent address remains the same each time the de vice c onnects to a network. A dynamic address changes each time the device connects to the netw ork, and is assigned by the network serv er using a class of software called Dynamic Host Conf iguration Protocol (DHCP). When you f irst po wer on the autoloader , the default method for setting the IP address is the dynamic method (DHCP). If yo u want to use DHCP you can sk ip this step. T o determine the IP address wh en using DHCP , view the Ethernet status information (see âV iew Ethernet Informationâ).
Installati on and Conf igur ation 48 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide T o set a dynamic IP address: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. Figur e 25: Main m enu 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Conf iguration subm enu, scroll to Ethernet. F igure 2 6: Select Ethernet 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Ethernet submenu, scro ll to Set IP . Figur e 2 7 : Set IP 6. Press Enter . 7. Scroll to Dynamic (DHCP). Figur e 28: Set Dynamic IP 8. Press Enter . St atus C omman ds î Configuration Diagnostics SC SI ID î Ether net T ime C hang e Mod e î î Set IP Set Subnet Mask S et G ate way Se t SNMP Server î Dy namic 3 Stati c IP 016.117.0 76.045
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 49 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide 9. Reboot to change the IP address. a. Press and hold the power b utton on the front panel until Po wer Of f appears on the LCD. b . Press the po wer button again to po wer on the autoloader . The IP address is changed. T o set a permanent IP address: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. (See Figure 25 .) 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Conf iguration submen u, scroll to Ethernet. (See Figure 26 .) 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Ethernet submenu, scro ll to Set IP . (See Figure 27 .) 6. Press Enter . 7. Scroll to Static IP . (See Figure 28 .) 8. Press Enter . 9. At each position of the IP address, scro ll to the correct numb er and press Enter to adv ance your cursor . Note: Use the Escape k ey to backspace t o a pr ev ious te xt box , if necessar y . When you ha ve set the IP address, th e autoloader displays Enter to sa ve. 10. Press Enter . The Conf iguration submenu reappears an d the permanent IP is no w in effect. Y ou do not need to reboot the autoloader . 11. Press Escape or Enter to return to th e Ethernet submenu. Subnet M ask Creating a subnet mask is a method to split IP networks into a series of subgroups, or subnets, to improve pe rformance and security . T o set a subnet mask: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. (See Figure 25 .) 2. Press Enter .
Installati on and Conf igur ation 50 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide 3. On the Conf iguration submen u, scroll to Ethernet. (See Figure 26 .) 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Ethernet submenu, scro ll to Set Subnet Mask. (See Figure 27 .) 6. Press Enter . 7. At each position of the mask address, scroll to the correct number and press Enter to adv ance your cursor . Figur e 29 : Set ting the Subnet Mask Note: Use the Escape k ey to backspace t o a pr ev ious te xt box , if necessar y . When you ha ve set the mask, the au toloader displays Enter to sa ve. 8. Press Enter . SUB addr changed to appears on the LC D. Y ou do not need to rebo ot the autoloader . 9. Press Escape or Enter to return to th e Ethernet submenu. IP Gate wa y An IP gate way is a de vice that con verts data into the IP protocol. T o set an IP gate way: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. (See Figure 25 .) 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Conf iguration submen u, scroll to Ethernet. (See Figure 26 .) 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Ethernet submenu, scroll to Set Gate way . (See Figure 27 .) 6. Press Enter . Subnet Mask: 255.255.195.000
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 51 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 7. At each position of the gate way address, scroll to the correct number and press Enter to adv ance your cursor . Figur e 30: Setting t he gatewa y address Note: Use Escape to backspace t o a pr ev iou s te xt box , if nec essary . When you hav e set the gate way address, the autoloader displays Enter to sav e. 8. Press Enter . GW changed appears on the d isplay . Y ou do not need to reboot the autoloader . 9. Press Escape or Enter to return to the menu. SNMP Ser ver An SNMP server mo nitors a network by processing reporting acti vity in each network de v ice (hub, router , bridge, an d so on). The server uses this information to def ine what is obtainable from each de vice and what can be control led (turned of f, on, and so on). T o set an SNMP server: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. (See Figure 25 .) 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Conf iguration submen u, scroll to Ethernet. (See Figure 26 .) 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Ethernet submenu, sc roll to Set SNMP Serv er . (See Figure 27 .) 6. Press Enter . Default Gatewa y : 016.117.065.001
Installati on and Conf igur ation 5 2 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 7. At each position of the server address, scroll to the correct number and press Enter to adv ance your cursor . Figur e 31: Setting t he SNMP ser ver address Note: Use the Escape k ey to backspace t o a pr ev ious te xt box , if necessar y . When you ha ve set the server address, the autoloader displays Enter to sa ve. 8. Press Enter . SNMP Server changed to appears on the LCD. Y ou do not need to rebo ot the autoloader . 9. Press Escape or Enter to return to th e Ethernet submenu. Tim e S er ver Y ou can connect the autoloader to a server that will supply the correct date and time using Simple Netw ork T ime Protocol (SNTP). The autoloader uses this information to time stamp information in its memory . T o set a time server: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. (See Figure 25 .) 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Conf iguration submen u, scroll to Ethernet. (See Figure 26 .) 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Ethernet submenu, scro ll to Set T ime Server . (See Figure 27 .) 6. Press Enter . SN MP Serve r: 255.255.255.255
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 53 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide 7. At each position of the server address, scroll to the correct number and press Enter to adv ance your cursor . Figur e 32: Setting the time server address Note: Use the Escape k ey to backspace t o a pr ev ious te xt box , if necessar y . When you ha ve set the server address, the autoloader displays Enter to sa ve. 8. Press Enter . T ime Server changed to appears on the panel display . Y ou do not need t o reboot the autoloader . 9. Press Escape or Enter to return to th e Ethernet submenu. Tim e If you cannot access a time server because your server does not support SNTP or for security reasons, you can set the tim e manually . If you want to include time changes such as dayl ight savings ti me, yo u must make those changes manually as well. Note: The DL T1 and SDL T aut oloaders do not ha ve a battery so if time is ma nuall y set , it i s lost and need s to b e reset when ev er the auto loader is p ow er cycled. T o set the timezone: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. Figur e 33: Main menu T ime Server : 192.005.044.041 St atus C omma nds î Configuration Diagnostics
Installati on and Conf igur ation 54 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Configur ation su bmenu, scroll to Time. Figur e 34: Selec t Time 4. Press Enter . 5. On the T ime subm enu, scroll to Set T imezone. Figur e 35: Select Set Timezone 6. Press Enter . The timezone screen appears. Figu re 36 : Ti me zon e sc re en 7. Scroll to set the number of hours dif ference between your local time and Greenwich Mean T ime (GMT). 8. Press Enter . SC SI ID Et hernet î Ti me C hange Mode î î Set T imezone Se t Dat e/Time Timez one: s et hr s G M T 0 :00
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 55 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide A ne w time zone screen appears. Figur e 3 7 : New timezone screen 9. Scroll to set the number of minutesâ dif ference between your local time and Greenwich Mean T ime (GMT). 10. Press Enter . The ne w timezone is set. T o set the date and time: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. (See Figure 33 .) 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Conf iguration subm enu, scroll to T ime. (See Figure 34 .) 4. Press Enter . 5. On the T ime subm enu, scroll to Set Date/T ime. Fi gure 38: Selecting Se t Date/Time 6. Press Enter . The Date/T ime screen appears, with th e cursor under the f irst digit in the second ro w . Figur e 3 9: Date/Time screen Timez one: s et mi ns G M T 0 :00 Se t Time zone î Set Da te/Time YYYY.MM.D D.HH.MM 2001.01.01.12.00 Us e 24 hour format, Time zo ne GM T 0:0 0
Installati on and Conf igur ation 56 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide 7. The first four digits represent the curre nt year . F or each digit, scroll to the correct number and press Enter to advance your cursor . Note: Use the Escape k ey to backspace t o a pr ev ious te xt box , if necessar y . 8. The ne xt two digits represent the cu rrent month. For each digit, scroll to the correct number and press Enter to advance your cursor . 9. The ne xt two digits represent the cu rre nt day . For each digit , scroll to the correct number and press Enter to advance your cursor . 10. The ne xt two digits represent the curre nt hour . For each digit, scroll to the correct number and press Enter to advance your cursor . 11. The last two digits represent the curre nt minute. F or each digit, scroll to the correct number and press Enter to advance your cursor . Enter to save appears on the LCD. 12. Press Enter . Security Y our autoloader includes a security optio n to password-protect the autoloaderâ s functionality . The default security setting is Off, meaning that no password is required. Ho wev er , you can enable the secu rity option so that users must enter a password to access functiona lity . Set Security When you f irst po wer on the autoloader , the security optio n is set to Off. Use the follo wing procedure to enable the security option. If the passwords are already set you must ha v e an administrator -le vel passw ord to set passwords. T o set the security option: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. Figur e 40: Main me nu St atus C omma nds î Configurat ion Diagnostics
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 57 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Conf iguration subm enu, scroll to Security . Figure 41: Se lect Se curity 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Security su bmenu, scroll to Security . If a check mark appears after th e word, the security option is on. If no ch eckmark appears, the security option is of f. Figur e 42: Security options 6. T o change th e setting, press Enter . This toggles the security option. For e xam ple, if the security opti on was set to On, it is no w set to Off, and no checkmark appears. Set P a ss words Many operations on the autoloader ar e pa ssword-protected to ensure data integrity . Y ou can set passwords at the ad ministrator le vel and at the operator le vel. Operator-le vel users ha ve acce ss to the Commands and Status menus. Administrator -lev el users hav e access to all functionality . Passw ords must be exactly six nu mbers long. The default pa ssword is 000000. T o set a password: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. (See Figure 40 .) 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Conf iguration submen u, scroll to Security . (See Figure 41 .) 4. Press Enter . Clea nin g Tape Co m pressio n î I/E Slot î Secur ity î î 3 Secu rit y Set Password
Installati on and Conf igur ation 58 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide 5. On the Security submen u, scroll to Set Passw ord. Figur e 43: Selec t Set P ass word 6. Press Enter . 7. T o set a password at the operator le vel, scroll to Operator . T o set a password at the administrator le vel, scroll to Administrator . Figur e 44 : Select pass word le vel 8. Press Enter . The Set Passw ord sc reen appears. Figur e 45: Set P asswor d sc re en 9. Press Enter again. A text box appears abo ve the f irs t asterisk. 10. In the text box, scroll to the first number of the passw ord. 11. Press Enter . The te xt box abov e the asterisk disappea rs and another text box appe ars abov e the next asterisk. 12. Repeat steps 10 and 11 to enter th e remaining numbers of the passw ord. 3 Sec urit y î Se t Password î O perator A dm inistra tor Lo gin as OP E nt er N e w Pas swo rd â â â â â â
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 59 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Note: Use the Escape k ey to backspace t o a pr ev ious te xt box , if necessar y . When you ha ve entered six numbers, the autoloader di splays Submit Password belo w the asterisks. 13. Press Enter to submit th e password. Password Successfully Changed appears on the LCD. 14. Press Enter . The Operator and Administrator optio ns reappear . Y ou can either enter another password, or press Escape or Enter to return to the main menu. Lost P asswords If you for get the administrator-le vel pass w ord, you cannot enter a ne w password . Y ou must call your customer service representati ve.
Installati on and Conf igur ation 60 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide
61 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 3 T ape Car tridge Usage This chapter describes the magnetic ta pes and ho w to handle them properly . T ape Car tridges Def in ed The follo wing tables list the types of me dia supported in each tape autoloader . T able 3: DL T1 Supported M edia Med ia Pa r t Number Form at Supported Operation SDL T I C7 980A An y Not supported DL T IV C5141F DL T4000 R e ad Onl y* DL T IV C5141F DL T7 000 Not sup ported* DL T IV C5141F DL T8000 Not sup ported* DL T IV C5141F DL T1/ V alueSt orage for mat R e ad and W rite DL T I cleaning tape C7 99 8A n/a Cleaning DL T clea ning tape C514 2F n/a Not sup ported SDL T 1 cleaning ta pe C7 9 82A n/a N ot su pported *Note: DL T IV media, w hich has a f ormat othe r than DL T 1, must be bulk er ased to allo w a DL T 1 dr ive to perf orm wr ites to the media . Erasing the data cartr idge in its ori ginal driv e is not adequa te b ecau se the ex isting, incom patible for mat remains on the tape cartr idge . The degauss ing equ ipment used to bu lk erase pre viously formatted media must have an O ersted r ati ng at least equal to, and pr efer ably two or three times greater than , the rating for the media bein g era sed. F or e xample , DL T T ype IV medi a is r ated at 1850 Oer steds. Specif ic pr oced ur es for degaussing y our med ia should be included with y our degaussing equipment . CA UTION: All prev iously recorded data is r emoved if you bulk er as e a tape ca rtridge . Note: Ultrium cartr idges ar e not compatible with DL T dri ves. Ultr ium cart r idges ar e not compa tible with t he SSL1016 DL T magazines .
T ape Cartr idge Usage 6 2 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide . . â DL Ttape IV data cartridges provide a storage capacity of up to 40 GB (nati ve)/80 GB (compressed) per cartrid ge. The tape cartridge shell is dark bro w n and has no pattern. â SDL T data cartridges a re green and hav e a storag e capacity of up to 160 GB (nati ve)/320 GB (compressed). â 400 GB (Ultrium 2) data cartridges are dark red and pro vide a storage capacity of up to 20 0 GB (nativ e)/400 GB (compressed). The 4 00 GB (Ultrium 2) data cartridges prov ide the highest capacities. T able 4 : SDL T 320 Supported M edia Med ia Pa r t Number Form at Supported Operation SDL T I C7 980A SD L T 220 R e ad and W rite SDL T I C7 980A SD L T 3 20 R e ad and W rite DL T IV C5141F DL T4000 R e ad Onl y DL T IV C5141F DL T7 000 Read Onl y DL T IV C5141F DL T8000 R e ad Onl y DL T IV C5141F DL T1/V alueSt orage f orma t Read Only DL T I cleaning tape C7 99 8A n/a Not support ed DL T clea ning tape C514 2F n/a Not sup ported SDL T 1 cleaning ta pe C7 9 82A n/a Cleaning Note: Ultr ium cartri dges ar e no t compatibl e w ith SDL T dri ve s. Ultr ium cartri dges ar e not compatib le with the S SL1016 SDL T maga zines. T able 5: Ultrium 46 0 Supported M edia Med ia Pa r t Number For ma t Supported Operation Ultr ium- 2 C7 9 7 2A Ultr ium- 2 R ead and W r ite (Ultr ium- 2 f ormat) Ultr ium-1 C7 9 71A Ultr ium-1 R ead and W r ite (Ultr ium-1 for mat) Ultr ium Univ ersal Clea nin g Car tridge C 7978 A n / a C l e a n i n g Note: DL T1 and SDL T cartridges ar e not compatible with the Ultrium dr ive . DL T1 and SDL T cartr idges ar e not compatible with the S S L1016 Ultr ium 460 maga zi nes.
T ape C a rtr idge Usa ge 63 S SL1 016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide â 200 GB (Ultrium 1) data cartridges are blue and pro vide storage capacity of up to 100 GB (nati v e)/200 GB (compressed). T ape Car tri dge M aintenance T o greatly reduce the chance of problems w ith your tape cartrid ges or damage to your tape dri ve, us e the followi ng guidelines. Inspec ting T ape Car tridges Inspect your tapes to identify an y poten tial tape cartridge problems and prev ent accidental loss of data or damage to your cartridges. In spect your tapes: â When you change or load a ne w tap e cartridge â If a tape cartridge is dropped or subjected to physical shoc k â If the tape driv e becomes inoperable after loading a tape cartridge â If you recei ve a shipment of tape cartridge s that shows an y sign of shipping damage T o inspect a tape: 1. Remov e the tape cartridge from its protecti ve plastic case. 2. Check the tape cartridge for obvious cracks o r other physical damage. Look for broken or missing parts. 3. Gently shake the tape cartridge. Li st en for any rattling or sounds of loose pieces inside the cartridge.
T ape Cartr idge Usage 64 S SL1016 T ape Au toloade r Ref er ence Guide 4. If you hear anything on DL T or SDL T cartrid ges, do not use the cartridge. a. If it doesn't rattle, check the tape leader inside the cartridge. T o do this, open the door on the rear of the ca rtridge by releasing the door lock. Fi gure 46: Opening the cartridge door
T ape C a rtr idge Usa ge 65 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide b . For SDL T cartridges: The loop should stick up about an eighth of an inch when viewed from the edge; the loop mu st be a closed loop. If the loop is torn, bent, pulled in, or not sticking up about an eigh th of an inch, do not use the tape cartridge. Figur e 4 7 : Checking t he SDL T tape leader 1 Good 2 Wo r n ( d o n o t u s e )
T ape Cartr idge Usage 66 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide c. For DL Ttapes: hold the tape cartridge so that the end that is inserted into the tape dri ve is facing you. On the left side of the tape cartridge you should see a small plastic tab . This is the left reel lock and can break if the cartridge is dropped. If you ca nnot see the tab, do not use the cartrid ge. d. For DL Tta pes: Do not use the cartri dge if you see an y of the follo wing conditions: Figur e 48: DL Ttape fault y leader situations 1 Sw allow ed leader - leader is completel y wound ar ound into the cartr idge , leaving no l oop for the buckl ing lin k to c atch. 2 T orn leade r loop - if the loop ge ts r ipped to cr eate an opening, the buc kli ng link will f ail to grab the loop and thus not tr ansport the tape into the dr ive . 3 Crea sed leade r loop - the loop is stuck and the cartr idge leader cannot un wind int o the dr ive . As the dr iv e leaderâs b uckling link engages t he cartrid ge leader loop , it can detac h the loop and dr ag it into the dri ve cau sing damage. e. For DL Ttapes: look at the bottom of the tape cartridge. The bottom reel lock is located in the lo wer right corner and can break if the cartridge is dropped. If you cannot see the tab, do not use the cartridge. Note: On the DL Ttape cartr idge , the r eel lock is w hite and eas y to see. 5. Check for proper operation of th e tape cartridge write-protect switch. 1 2 3
T ape C a rtr idge Usa ge 67 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Prot ec ting T ape Cartridges T o extend the life of your tape cartridges: â Remov e dust on the outside of tape cartridges with a damp cloth. â Do not use adhesi ve labels or P O ST -IT notes on the top, side, or bo ttom of your tape cartridge. Use only the label provided with each cartridge and slide it in the label slot on the cartridge. â Do not use graphite p e ncils, water-soluble felt p e ns, or oth er debris-producing writing instruments on labels. â Replace â ne ver erase â a labe l. â Put unused cartridge labels in a separate location. A static electricity charge on a cartridge may cause a label to cling to the cartridge. If you accidentally insert a label into the dri ve along w ith a cartridge, the label may cause problems with or damage to the tape dri ve. â Do not touch or allo w direct contact with tape or tape leader . Dust or natural skin oils may contaminate the ta pe and impact tape performance. â Do not e xpose the tape cartridge to moisture or direct sunlight. â Do not e xpose cartridges to extreme temperatures or humidity . Refer to the documentation that co mes with your tape med ia for appropriate operating and storage temperatures. â Do not e xpose tape cartrid ges to magnetic f ields. â A void unnecessary opening of the cartridg e door; this can e xpose the tape to contamination or phys ical damage. â Do not drop the tape cart ridges or su bject the cartridges to physical shock. â Do not insert an y cartridge that has been dropped into a tape driv e without carefully inspecting for dam age. A dropped cartridge can ha ve dislodged, loosened, or damaged internal componen ts which can also damage the tape driv e. â Do not take tape cartridges apart. â Do not lea ve cartridges in the tape dr i ve when the autoloader po wer is of f.
T ape Cartr idge Usage 68 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide T r anspor ting T ape Car tridges T o safely transport tape cartridges: â Always keep each tape cartridge in its protecti ve plastic case when it is not in the tape dri ve. â When carrying tape cartridges in their ca ses, al ways orient the ca ses so that the groov es in the cases interlock. This prev ents the cases from slip ping apart and falling. â Do not carry cartri dges loosely in a box or in any other container . Allo wing cartridges to hit together exposes them to unnecessary physical shock. Storin g T ape Ca r tridg es T o store tape cartridges properly: â Ne ver stack more than fi v e tape cartridges. â When placing tape cartridges in archi val storage, mak e sure you stand each tape cartridge vertically . â Store tape cartridges in their plastic containers and in the en vironmental conditions recommended in your tape media documentation. â If storage and/or transportation of a tape cartridge has exposed it to conditions outside the recommended en vironment, âcond itionâ the tape cartridge to its operating en vironment for a 24-hour period. â Do not place cartridges on or near devices that may produce magnetic fields such as computer monitors, motors, or video equipment. Such exposure can alter or erase data on the tape.
T ape C a rtr idge Usa ge 69 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Using th e W r ite -Protect Sw itc h All tape cartridges hav e a write-protect switch to prev ent accidental erasure of data. When you enable write-protection, e xisting data on the tape cannot be ov erwritten, nor can additional data be ap pended to the tape . When you disable write-protection, existing data on the tape can be overwr itten, and addit ional data can be appended . Note: Befo re loading a car tr idge into y our autoloader , make sur e that you set the wr ite-pr otect sw itch to the desir ed position . DL T IV Car tridges Fi gure 4 9: W rite-pr otect swit c h, DL T IV 1 W r ite-pro tected ( An or ange indicato r appears a b o ve the s witc h) 2 W rite-en abled 1 2
T ape Cartr idge Usage 7 0 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide T able 6 : W rite -Protect Sw itc h P ositions W rite-Protect S witch Po s i t i o n Orange Indicator Resul t W rite-Pro tected (with the h ub f acing d own an d the write -p r o tec t switc h facin g you as sh o wn in Fi g u re 49 , sli de the swit ch to the left . ) Vis i bl e â Data ca nnot be written to the tape. â Existing data on the tape cannot be ov er wr itten. â Additional data cannot be appended to the media. W rite-Enabled ( with t he hub f acing d own an d the write -p r o tec t switc h facin g you as sh o wn in Fi g u re 49 , sli de the swit ch to the r ight.) Not v isible Unless t he cartri dge is wr ite- pr otected v ia softwar e: â Data can be wr it ten to the tape. â Existing data on the tape can be o verwr itten . â Additional data on the tape can be ov er wr itten.
T ape C a rtr idge Usa ge 71 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide SDL T 3 20 Cart ridge Figure 50 illustrates using the write-protect switch. By mo ving the switch to the left 1 , the cartridge is write-protected, a nd b y moving the switch t o the right 2 , the cartridge is write-enabled. Figur e 50: W rite-protec t s witch, SDL T 3 20 2 1
T ape Cartr idge Usage 7 2 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Ultrium Data Cartridge 1 sho ws the location of the right protec t switch. By mo ving the switch on the bottom of the cartridge to the right, the cartridge is write-prot e cted, and b y moving the switch to the left, the cartridge is write-enabled. Figur e 51: W rite-protect switch, Ultrium 1
73 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 4 Autoloader O peration Y ou can operate the autoloader by an y of the follo w ing methods: â Autoloader front panel â Operate manua lly to insert and eject tapes and to unload magazines. â Ethernet W eb Administration â The Ethernet connection lets you perform administrati ve functions remotely us ing W eb Administration. Y ou can also mov e tapes within the autoloader through the Ethernet co nnection. â Host backup software â The SCSI bu s connects the autoloader to the host server and the backup software. Y ou can perform any fu nctions contained in the backup softw are. Fr ont P anel Components The front panel includes a blue backlit liq uid crystal display (LCD), four function ke ys ( [scroll up], [scroll do wn], Enter , and Escape ), and two LEDs. Fun c t io n Key s Use the function ke ys to na vi gate through the menu and select options. Use the up and do wn scroll buttons to position the cursor ne xt to the item you want. Once the cursor is in place, press Enter to select the item. T o return to a previous menu without making a selection, press Escape . The Escape button can also function as a backspace key .
Aut oloader Operati on 7 4 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide LEDs The LEDs display autoloader and driv e stat us information. When th e autoloader is po wered on, the left, green LED gi ves ready status information, and the right, amber LED gi ves fault status information. LC D The LCD displays a scrolling menu that lets you to access information and e xecute comm ands. Note: When the autoloader is idle for mor e than 60 sec onds, the logo screen appears on the L CD , si milar to the scr eensav er function on y our PC. Pr ess any functi on ke y to displa y th e top-le vel me nu . The four menus displayed on the LCD are circular menus; you can scroll th rough the options using either the up or do wn scroll buttons. The f irst menu you access on the front panel contains the top-le vel menu items. Each item in turn contains submenus. T able 7 : Indicator Ac tiv it y Indicator State Operating Condition Left (green ) On Slow F lash Fas t Fl a s h Aut oloader and tape dri ve ar e idle. T ape dr iv e on l y is activ e. Aut oloader only is acti ve or aut oloader and ta pe dri ve a re acti v e. Rig h t ( a m b e r) O f f On Conti nuous flash Br ief f lash No err ors or pr oblems detected. T ape dr iv e or autoloader err or is detected . Non-har dw a r e er ro r is detected (f or ex ample , cleaning is r equir ed. POST i n pro gres s
Aut oloader Operation 75 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide Figur e 5 2: Menu T ree Structure Note: F or SSL1016 Ultr ium 460 tape au toloader s, dr iv e logs and dri v e read/w rite t ests mu st b e accessed using L ibrary & T ape T ools. L& T T is available at: ht tp: //w ww .hp .com/su ppor t/tap etool s . All the functionality accessed from the sc rolling menu is passw ord-protected. T wo le vels of security are b uilt into the menu. The lower -le vel security is the operator le vel and the higher -le vel security is the administrator le vel. There is one password for each lev el. Status Configuration Diagnostic Te sts Error Logs Halt Test Self Test Health Chec k Picker Test Magazine Test Inventory Test Drive Read SCSI ID Autoload er Ethernet Set IP Dynamic (DHCP) Stat ic IP Set Subnet Mas k Set Gateway Set SNMP Se rver Set Ti me Server Time Set Date/Ti me Set Time Zon e Cha nge Mo de Stat us Random Sequenti al Seq Cycle Mode Cleaning Tape Auto C l e an Tape Lo cation Compressi on Security Security Set Password System Up date V ersion Element Stat us Drive Stat us V ersion Ethernet I/E Slot Commands Eject Tape to Mail Slot By Barcod e By Location From Dr ive Right Mag azine Left Magaz ine Enter (Mai l Slot) To Drive To Locati on Move Inventory Enter Pass word Log Out Cleaning T ape Load to D rive Unload F rom Drive Enter Cl eaning Tape Eject Clean ing Tape Sequenti al Ops Start Resume Stop Home Drive Writ e Drive Read /Write Mixed
Aut oloader Operati on 7 6 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide The administrator password accesses all the a v ailable functionality . The operator password accesses all the functionality in the Commands and Status submenus. Fron t P a n e l Fu n c t io n al i t y For mo st functions, you can use either the front p anel or the W eb Administration tool through the Ethernet connection. Setting P ass wor ds Many functions on the autoloader may be password-protected to ensure data integrity . T o access the menu items necessa ry to ex ecute these functions, you must f irst enter your password. All passwords are six numeric digits. T o set a password, see the section âSet P ass w o rdsâ in Chapter 2. When a passwor d has been entered, all passw ord-protected functionality is a vailable until the user logs out. If you d o not use the front panel for a period of time, the logo reappears on the LCD. When the logo rea ppears, the autoloader has automatically logged you out. Y ou will ha ve to re-enter your password to access the menu functionality . Default F ront P anel P ass wor d The def a ult passwo rd for the front panel is 000000. Logou t T o logout: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Commands. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Commands subm enu, scroll to Log Out. 4. Press Enter . Session Complete appears on the LCD.
Aut oloader Operation 77 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Using Data Cartridges T ypically , when you f irst inst all your autoloader , you inse rt your cartridges int o the magazines and then insert the magazi nes into the autoloader . Ho wev er , you can insert and eject cartridges indi vidually using the mailslot, or you can eject a magazine, manually insert and remov e cartr idges, then insert the magazine back into the autoloader . The au toloader automatically detects the presence of a cartridge in the mailslot and in a magazine slot. Note: On th e fr ont panel m enu , Enter or Eject means the tape enters and leaves the aut oloader thr ough the mailslot. Whene ver y ou see Load or Unload, it means the tape is loaded into or unloaded fr om the tape dri ve. If you try to perform an ille gal operation, the autoloader refuses to perform the operation. F o r e xample, if you try to inse rt a cartridge through the mailslot to the dri ve but the dri ve already contains a car tridge, the mailsl ot does not unlock. If you try to unlo ad a cartridge from the dri v e while the autoloader is writing to the tape, your command is igno red. In sert in g a S ing le C artr id ge Use the mailslot to insert a single cartri dge into the autoloader . Y ou must enter a v alid password to unl ock th e mailslot before you can insert a cartridge. When you insert a cartridge through the mailslot, you ca n load it into the tape dri ve or store i t in a magazine. Note: Be sure y ou are u sing a c artr idge that is compatible with y our tape dri ve . See Chapter 3 , âT ape Cart r idg e Usage, â for c ompati bilit y tables. T o insert a cartridge into the tape driv e: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Commands. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Commands subm enu, scroll to Enter . 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Enter submenu, scroll to T o Driv e. 6. Press Enter .
Aut oloader Operati on 7 8 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide After Load cartridge appears on the LC D, a countdo wn ap pears. Y ou have 20 seconds to load a cartridge through the mailslot before it relocks. The autoloader automatically loads the cartridge into the tape dri ve. Note: Only insert the cartr idg e until y ou meet r esistance . Figur e 53: Inserting a car tridge into th e mailslot T o insert a cartridge to a magazine slot: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Commands. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Commands subm enu, scroll to Enter . 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Enter submenu, scroll to T o Location. 6. Press Enter . A map of all the magazine slo ts appears. Occupied slots are indicated by an asterisk. 7. Scroll to the slot where you w ant to store the cartridge. 8. Press Enter .
Aut oloader Operation 79 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide After Load cartridge appears on the LC D, a countdo wn ap pears. Y ou have 20 seconds to load a cartridge through the mailslot before it relocks. The autoloader automatically loads the cartri dge into the selected slot. Mov ing a Single Car tridge T o move a single cartridge from one loca tion to another insi de the autoloader: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Commands. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Commands subm enu, scroll to Mov e. 4. Press Enter . The Mov e screen appears. 5. Under From:, scroll to the current loca tion of th e cartridge you want to mov e. Occupied slots are indica ted by an asterisk. Note: If you sele ct an empt y lo cation No Source El ement appe ars on the LCD . Ch oose a differ ent location . 6. Press Enter . 7. Under T o:, scroll to the location to which you want to mov e the cartridge. Occupied slots are indica ted by an asterisk. Note: If you select a lo cation that is alread y occ up ied Destination F ull ap p ear s on the L CD . Choo se a differ en t location . 8. Press Enter . The LCD displays Ent or Esc? below your selections. 9. Press Enter . An hour glass appears on the LCD as the autoloader mov es the cartridge to its ne w location.
Aut oloader Operati on 80 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Ejecting a Singl e Cartridge Y ou can remov e a single cartridge from the autoloader by spec ifying the desired cartridge by barcode or location, or b y ch oosing the cartridge currently in the tape driv e. T o eject a cartridge by barcode: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Commands. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Commands subm enu, scroll to Eject. 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Eject submenu, scroll to Cartridge. 6. Press Enter . 7. Scroll to By Barcode. A barcode label appears. 8. Scroll to the label that corresponds to the cartridge you want to unload. 9. Press Enter . An hour glas s appears on the LCD as the cartridge yo u want is ejected from the mailslot.W ait until the hourglass disappea rs from the LCD before pulling out the cartridge. T o eject a cartridge by location: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Commands. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Commands subm enu, scroll to Eject. 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Eject submenu, scroll to Cartridge. 6. Press Enter . 7. Scroll to By Location. A map of all the magazine slo ts appears. Occupied slots are indicated by an asterisk. 8. Scroll to the slot containing the cartridge you w ant to eject. 9. Press Enter .
Aut oloader Operation 81 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide An hour glas s appears on the LCD as the cartridge yo u want is ejected from the mailslot.W ait until the hourglass disappea rs from the LCD before pulling out the cartridge. T o eject a cartridge from the tape dri ve: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Commands. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Commands subm enu, scroll to Eject. 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Eject submenu, scroll to Cartridge. 6. Press Enter . 7. Scroll to From Dri ve. 8. Press Enter . An hour glas s appears on the LCD as the cartridge yo u want is ejected from the mailslot. W ait until the hourglass disapp ears from the LCD before pulling out the cartridge. Note: After e jecting a single cartr idge , immediat ely r emo ve it f rom t he mail slot when pr ompte d. Rem oving a M a gaz in e When you want to remove se veral cart ri dge s at once, remo ve the magazine(s) fi rs t . T o remov e a magazine: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Commands. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Commands subm enu, scroll to Eject. 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Eject submenu, scroll to Right Ma gazine or Left Magazine. 6. Press Enter .
Aut oloader Operati on 8 2 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Y ou will hear a distinctiv e popping sound as the appropriate maga zine is ejected from the autoloader . Left magazine has be en ejected or Right mag azine has been ejected appears on the LCD. Caution: T o pr ev ent damage to the autoloader or the maga zine, u se both hands when r emo ving the maga zine fr om the aut oloader , supporting th e entire length of the magazine . 7. Grasp the magazine by the handle with one hand and slide it out, suppo rting it underneath with the othe r hand. Note: Once yo u eject a maga zine , you m ust full y r emov e it or fully r e-install it bef or e pow er ing off the autoloader . Fig ure 54 : Rem oving a m ag azi ne
Aut oloader Operation 83 S SL1 016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide Installing a Magazine T o install a magazine: Note: Be sure y ou ar e using the pr oper maga zine for y our aut oloader . DL T/SDL T maga zines are no t compatible w ith the SSL1016 Ultr ium 460 Au toloader . Ultr ium maga zines are no t compatible wit h the SSL1016 DL T1 Auto loader or the SSL10106 SDL T 3 20 Autoloader . 1. Grasp the mag azine by the handle with one hand and support it underneath with the other hand. 2. Slide the magazine into the magazine bay . Make sure you positio n the magazine correctly; it sh ould slide smoothly . Caution: Be sure that yo u install only a left-or iented magazine in the left bay and a ri ght-ori ented maga z ine in the r ight bay . Fi gure 5 5: Installing a maga zine 3. The magazine is correctly installed wh en you feel it click into place and the front is flush with the front panel. Left Mag Inserted or Right Mag Inserted appears on the LCD.
Aut oloader Operati on 84 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Inserting and Remov ing Cart ridges The magazine must be fully remo ve d to insert and remo ve cartridges. There are two ge ars located on both ends of the magazine. Mo ve the slots within the magazine b y using these two gear s. Use the two openin gs along the top of the magazine and t he four openings along the bottom of the mag azine to insert and remov e cartridg es from the eight slots within each ma gazine. T o insert a cartridge into the magazine: 1. Center a slot within one of t h e six openings on the side of the magazine. 2. Properly orient the cartridge. Note: Ther e is a k ey ing featur e in each slot t hat only lets y ou full y insert the cartr idge one wa y . 3. Fully insert the cartridge into the slot. When pushing the cartridge into the slot you will feel slight resistance until the ca rtridge is properly seated into the slot. Figur e 56: Inserting a cartridge T o remove a cartridge, use the handles to ce nter the desired slot in the op enings on the side of the magazine. Use yo ur thumb and index fi n ger to pull out the cartridge. Y ou will feel slight resist ance when removing the cartridge. 1 2
Aut oloader Operation 85 S SL1 016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide Manually Remo ving a Magazine T o remo ve a magazine manually: 1. Po wer off the autoloader . 2. Place the autoloader on a flat, stable surface. 3. Locate the small rectan gular opening on the back of the autoloader behind the magazine that you want to remo ve. Figu re 57 : Ma nu ally removi ng a mag azi ne 2 1
Aut oloader Operati on 86 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide 4. Carefully insert the end of a small, sturdy tool, such as a jewelerâ s scre wdriv er , about one inch into the op ening. On a right magazine, keep the tool as far to the left as you can. On a left magazine, keep the tool as far to the right as you can. 5. On a right magazine, slide the tool to the right. On a left magazine, slide the tool to the left. Y ou will feel resistance as the tool presses against the latch. Press hard enough to release the latch. Fig ure 58 : In si de rel ea se l at c h When you release the latch, the mag azine pops forward so that the front of the magazine is no longer fl ush with the front panel. 6. W ith one hand, g rasp the magazine by the handle and s lide it forward to remo ve. Place your other hand under the mag azine to support it and pre vent it from falling.
Aut oloader Operation 87 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Changing the Orientation Any magazine can be conf igured to f it in the ri ght or left magazine bay . T o change the orientation of a mag azine: 1. Remov e the two scre ws that attach th e handle to the front of the magazine. Figur e 5 9: Removing the screw s 2. Unsnap the hand le carefully , ensuring you do no t break the hinge. 3. Rotate the handle 180 d egrees so that what wa s the top of the handle is no w the bottom. 4. Rotate the magazine 18 0 degrees so that what was the front of the magazine is no w the rear .
Aut oloader Operati on 88 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide Figur e 60: Remo ving the handl e 5. Snap the ha ndle back on the end of the magazi ne. 6. Install the two scre ws to attach the handle securely to the magazine. Vie wing S tatus Information From the scrolling menu, you can vie w the follo wing information: â Autoloader status â Firmware v ersion â Element status â T ape driv e status â T ape driv e version â Ethernet information â System performance 1 2
Aut oloader Operation 89 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Autoloader Status The autoloader status pr o vides information about: â Whether a magazine is instal led or not â SCSI connection acti v ity â Ethernet connection acti vity T o view the autoloader status: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Status. Figur e 61: Main me nu 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Status submenu, scroll to autoloader Info. F igure 6 2: Select Au toloader Inf o 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Autoloader Info submenu, scroll to Status. F igure 6 3: Select S tatus 6. Press Enter . î Status C omma nds Conf iguration Diagnostics î A utoloader Info D rive Inf o Et hernet I nfo î Status Ve rsion Element Status
Aut oloader Operati on 90 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide A list of messages similar to the follo wing screen appears. Figur e 64 : Autoloader status m essage T able 8: Autoload er Status Messag es Magazine L= â The left m agazine is pres ent. R= â The right ma gazine is present. L= (no â ) The left magaz ine is not present. R= (no â ) The right magazine is not pr esent. Loader ONLINE The au toloader SCSI connection is act ive . OFFLINE The autoload er SCSI connection is not active . Drive ONLINE The driv e SCSI connection is active . OFFLINE The drive SCSI connect ion is not active . Mode Random Def a ult. The autoloader is operating in Random mode. Mix ed The autoloader is oper ating in Mix ed mode. Sequential The autoloader is oper ating in Sequential mode . Seq Cycle Mode The autoloader is operatin g in Seq Cycle Mode. NO TE: ISVs suppor t diff erent modes o f operation. Be sure your autoloader is set to the correct mode of operation. The autoloader defaults to Random mode. See âControl Modeâ in Chapter 2 fo r addi tional information. Bar code Reader â A barcode reader is present. No â A barcod e reader is no t present. M agaz i nes : L â R â Loa der: ONLINE D rive : ONLIN E Mode: Mixed Barcode Reader: â
Aut oloader Operation 91 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide View Fir mware V e r si on T o view the f irmware v ersion: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Status. (See Figure 6 1 .) 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Status submenu, scro ll to Autoloader Info. (See Figure 62 .) 4. Press Enter . 5. On the autoloader Info subm enu, scroll to V ersion. (See Figure 63 .) 6. Press Enter . A list of messages similar to the follo wing screen appears. Figur e 65: Autoloader version messages T able 9: Autoloader V ersion M essages Firmware The number indic ates the fir mware v ersion . EDC The number indicates the Error Detection Co de that was gener ated when the firmware was installe d. The autoloa der uses this num ber to verify that the fir mware and the memory holding the firmware are go od. HW Rev T he number indicates the ha rdware v ersion. ME Rev The number indicat es the mechanical version. F i rmwa re : V 7.0 E D C: 575A 49B 8 H W ME R e v : 1 1
Aut oloader Operati on 92 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide Vie w Element Status The element status reports the status of the magazine slots. The status indicates whether a slot contains a cartridge, and wh ich slot is allocated as the cleaning cartridgeâ s slot. T o view an elementâ s status: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Status. (See Figure 6 1 .) 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Status submenu, scro ll to Autoloader Info. (See Figure 62 .) 4. Press Enter . 5. On the autoloader Info submenu, scroll to Element Status. (See Figure 63 .) Figur e 66: E lement status Press Enter to vie w ma gazines. A map of all the magazine slots appears. An asterisk (*) indicates a slot occupied by a data cartridg e, a (@) indicates a slot occupied by a cleaning cartridg e, and an (!) indicates an empty slot designated as cleaning slot. Figur e 6 7 : Mag azine map Note: If the I/E slo t is ena bled, I/E Sl ot re places eithe r Slot 1 or Slot 16 . 6. Scroll to the slot containing the cartridge for which you want to see the status. 7. Press Enter . â Drive: A D I285 M ail slot: Picker: Enter to Vi ew M agaz ines Sl ot 1 Sl ot 2 * Sl ot 3 * Sl ot 4 * Sl ot 5 Sl ot 9 Sl ot 1 3 * Sl ot 6 S l ot 1 0 * Sl ot 1 4 * Sl ot 7 * S l ot 11* S l ot 1 5 * S l ot 8 * Sl ot 1 2 * S l ot 1 6 *
Aut oloader Operation 93 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide The Element Status screen appears, di splaying the barcode label for that cartridge (if an in v entory has pre viously been run). A mov e command also appears on the screen. Fig ure 68: El em ent sta tu s sc re en a. If you want to mov e the cartridge scroll until the location you want to mov e to appears under TO :, then press Enter . b . If you do not want to mo ve the cartridge, press Escape . Vie w T ape Dri ve Status T o view the tape dri ve status: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Status. (See Figure 6 1 .) 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Status submenu, scroll to Driv e Info. (See Figure 62 .) 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Dri ve Info submen u, scroll to Status. (See Figure 63 .) 6. Press Enter . A list of messages similar to the follo wing screen appears. Figur e 6 9: Drive status screen Label: DRC101 M ove Slot 2 To: Slot 9 Es c to Exit SC SI ID 5 Loa der LUN 1 Compressio n Enable d D rive Ca rt Present
Aut oloader Operati on 9 4 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Vie w T ape Dri ve V ersion T o view the tape dr ive v ersion: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Status. (See Figure 6 1 .) 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Status submenu, scroll to Driv e Info. (See Figure 62 .) 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Dri ve Info submenu, scroll to V ersion. (See Figure 63 .) 6. Press Enter . A list of messages similar to the follo wing screen appears. Figur e 7 0: T ape driv e version sc re en T able 10: T ape Dri ve Status Messag es SCSI ID The number indicates th e autoloader SCSI ID numb er . Loader LUN The number indicat es the Logical Unit Number of the autoloader . Compression Indicate s whether the tape d r iv e compression is enab led or disab led. Drive Cart Indicat es whether a car tr idge is pres ent in the drive. T able 11: T ape Dri ve V ersion Messages Pr oduct T ype The number indicates the type of product installed (DL T1). P olicy V ersion The numb er indicates the v ersion of the policy processor for the tape driv e, typically the tape driv e fir mware v ersion. Servo V ersion The numb er indicates the servo pr ocessor fir mware v ersion. Pr oduct Ty pe: DLT 1 Policy Versio n: 35.52 Se rvo Ver sion: 65.6
Aut oloader Operation 95 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide View Eth ernet Informati on T o view Ethernet information: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Status. (See Figure 6 1 .) 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Status submenu, sc roll to Ethernet Info. (See Figure 62 .) 4. Press Enter . A list of messages similar to the follo wing screen appears. Figur e 71: Vie w Et hernet information Run In ventor y The autoloader provides a method to keep track of the cartridges currently loaded in the magazines. If your autoloader is eq uipped with a barco de reader , it can scan the cartridge barcode labels and store the data i n its non-v olatile memory . The autoloader automatically runs an in v entory whene ver you po wer it on or insert a maga zine. T o tak e in v e ntory: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Commands. 2. Press Enter . T able 12 : Ethernet Information M essages Mac Addres s Indicates the serial num ber of your Ethe r net card. IP Address The number indicat es the static IP address or the currently assigne d dynamic IP address. Network Indicates whether or not t he autoloader is conn ected to the netw or k. M A C address: 00-e0-9e-03-0e-39 I P A ddress 16.116.76.46 Ne twork: Disconnected
Aut oloader Operati on 9 6 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 3. On the Commands submen u, scroll to In vent ory . 4. Press Enter . The autoloader scans the barcodes on all the cartridges present. Note: If no bar code label is pr esent t he autoloade r checks f or the pr esence or a bsence of cartr idges in all l ocations. Set Data Compression Y ou can set the autoloader to write data to the tape in its nati v e (uncompressed) format or to compress it. Compressing the data means that the autoloader can typically write twice as much data to the same amount of tape. Actual compression may v ary , depending on the type of data being b a cked up. Compression also increases the performance of the data transfers from or to the SCSI bus. T ypically you will want to leav e this option enabled unless you are backing up data that is already compressed. Attempting to compress compressed data can reduce pe rformance and increas e data size. T o set compression option: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. Figur e 7 2: M ain menu 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Conf iguration subm enu, scroll to Compression. Figur e 7 3: Set Compression St atus C omma nds î Configurati on Diagnostics T ime C han ge M ode î Clea nin g Tap e î Co mpres sion î
Aut oloader Operation 97 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 4. Press Enter . If a check appears next to Compression, the compression option is enabled. If no checkmark appears, the co mpression option is disabled. a. T o leav e the compression o ption unchanged, press Escape . b . T o change the compress ion option, press Enter . Update F irmw are Autoloader f irmware can be updated b y using Library & T ape T ools (L&TT). Additional details can be obtained at: http://w ww .hp .com/support/tapetools Configur ation T o change an y Ethernet conf igurations, see âEth ernetâ in Chapter 2. Import/Expor t Slot Note: An y chan ge req uir es a po wer c ycl e of the a uto loader and r econf i gurati on of t he IS V soft war e. T o change the config uration of the Import/Export slot : 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. Figur e 7 4 : Main menu 2. Press Enter . St atus C omma nds î Configurati on Diagnostics
Aut oloader Operati on 9 8 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 3. On the Conf iguration subm enu, scroll to I/E Slot. Figur e 7 5: Configur e Import /Export Slot 4. Press Enter . If a check appears next to Import/Export Slot, the I/E slot is enabled. If no checkmark appears, the I/E slot is disabled. a. T o leav e the I/E slot unchanged, press Escape . b . T o change the I/E s lot, press Enter . Any change requires a po wer cycle of th e autoloader and reco nf iguration of the ISV software. If the autoloader is not po wer cycled: â The changes will not occur . â The front panel red LED flashes and displays a â Please power cycle â message. When the I/E slot is enabled, Slot 16 is designated as the I/E slot, when two magazines are present. Clea nin g Tape Co m pressio n î î I/ E Slo t Se curity î
Aut oloader Operation 99 S SL101 6 T ape A utoloader Ref erence Gui de We b A d m i n i s t r a t i o n Many of the same operations performed from the front panel can also be performed remotely using W eb Administration. The follo wing browsers are recommen ded for use with W eb Administration: â Wi n d o w s ® â Internet Explorer 5 .0, 5.5, and 6.x â Netscape 4.x and 6.x â Linux, Unix ® , and Sun Solaris⢠8 â Netscape 4.x and 6.x After establishing a connection to the autoloader , open the HTML bro w ser and enter the IP address of the autoloader . (See â Autoloader IP Addressâ or contact your web administrator .) Be sure that proxy server settings in your browser are disabled. Fi gure 7 6: W eb Administr ation Home P age
Aut oloader Operati on 100 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Default P asswor d The default user ID is guest. The def ault password is guest. See âSet Secu rity Optionâ in this chapter fo r information o n changing the user ID and password. Status information appea rs on the right side of the home page an d e very page of W eb Administration. The menu heading s also appear at the top of e very page. T o access the functionality under the menu he ading, click the menu heading. W eb Administration prom pts you for your username and ID, then display s the opening page for that menu. The Conf iguration page includes a submen u on the left side of the page. When W eb Administration displays the f irst Configuration page, it is open to the Systems Operations submenu. Y o u can click Networking to access Ethernet settings options, and Security to access security settings options. Figur e 77 : Configuration P age Usually , after you hav e set the options, you click a Submit button to implement the ne w settings. Next to all Submit b uttons is a Reset button. The Reset b utton does not reset the autoloader to its def a u lt settings, it just clears the settings in the option so that you ca n change them.
Aut oloader Operation 101 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide View S ta tu s In for ma ti o n T o view status information from W eb Administrati on, you only ha ve to open it. Y ou do not need to ex ecute any command to see it because the status information appears on the right s ide of e very page. This information is updated automatically e very 10 second s, so the status you see is real-time information. Mov e T apes To m o v e a t a p e : 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Commands . 2. From the drop-do wn menu under Mo ve tape from:, select the current location of the tape you want to mov e . Note: Y ou c an also clic k the slot on the graphic to select it. 3. From the drop-down menu un der T o:, se lect the location to which you want to move the ta pe . 4. Click submit.
Aut oloader Operati on 102 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Fi gure 7 8: Mo ving tapes using W eb Admi nistration
Aut oloader Operation 103 S SL1016 T ape A utoloader Ref erence Gui de Run In ventor y The autoloader automatically runs an in ventory when you po w er it back on or insert a magazine. If you need to run an in ventory in addition to this, you can us e W eb Administration to do it remotely . T o run an in ve n tory: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Commands . 2. On the Commands p age, click In ventory . Set to Home If the autoloader is not able to suc cessfully ex ecute a move or in v entory command, try ex ecuting a HOM E command and then retry the mov e or in ventory command again. The HOME co mmand resets the au toloader as a means to help the autoloader recov er from an unknown internal condition. Y ou should very rarely need t o use this command. T o set to Home: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Commands . 2. On the Commands p age, click Home .
Aut oloader Operati on 104 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Run Diagnostic T e sts If the status information indicate s an error , view the e vent log. T o v i ew th e eve n t l o g : 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Diagnostics . Figur e 7 9: Diagnostic page 2. Click Vi e w L o g . Note: See Chapter 6, âT r oubleshooting, â for a list of err or messages. When an error message ap pears in the status information, you may need to run a diagnostic test. T o run a diagnostic test: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Diagnostics . 2. From the T est drop-down menu, select the diagnostic test that yo u want to run. 3. Click submit.
Aut oloader Operation 105 S SL1 016 T ape Au toloader Refe rence Guide 4. While the test is running, you can view the status of the test by clicking Vi e w Status . T o refresh the status information, click the Back button on yo ur bro wser, and then click the V iew Status b utton again. 5. T o sav e the report, click File , Sa ve As , then navigate to the directory where you want it sav ed. Set the S y stem Ti me If your autoloader is not connected to a time server , you can set the time manually with W e b Administration. Note: The DL T1 and SDL T aut oloaders do not ha ve a battery so if time is ma nuall y set , it i s lost and need s to b e reset when ev er the auto loader is p ow er cycled. Enter the time zone f irst, then the date and time. If you want to include time changes, such as da ylight sa vin gs time, you must set those manually wh en the y occur . T o set the time zone: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Conf igurations . 2. From the f irst drop-down list ne xt to Ti me Zo ne, select the number of hoursâ dif ference betwee n your local time and Greenwich Mean T ime (GMT). 3. From the second drop-down list next to T ime Zone, select the numbe r of minutesâ difference between your local time and Greenwich Mean T ime (GMT). 4. Click submit.
Aut oloader Operati on 106 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Figure 80: Set ting s ystem tim e T o set the date and time: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Conf igurations . 2. From the month d rop-down list, select the current month. 3. From the day drop-down list, select the current day . 4. From the year drop-down list, select the current ye ar . 5. In the hour text box, type the current hour , in 24-hour format. 6. In the minute text box, type the current minut e. 7. Click submit.
Aut oloader Operation 10 7 S SL1 016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide Cha nge the S CSI ID If you need to change the autoloaderâ s SCSI ID, you can do so from the W eb Administration tool . T o change the SCSI ID: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Conf igurations . 2. From the drop-do wn list under SCSI ID, click the number to which you w ant to set the ID. Figure 81: Setting th e SCSI ID 3. Click submit. Y ou must reboot the autoloader befo re the new SCSI ID takes ef fect. Note: F or the Ultr i um 460 aut oloader you m ust set t wo S CSI IDs; one f or the aut oloader and one f or the tape dr iv e . The def ault SCS I ID for t he autoloade r is 4. The def ault S CSI ID for t he tape dr i ve is 5 .
Aut oloader Operati on 108 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Set the Contr ol Mode T o set the control mode: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Conf igurations . Under Mode, the current mo de is selected. Figur e 82: Setting th e Contr ol M ode 2. T o change the mode, click a dif ferent op tion. 3. Click submit. Y ou must reboot the autoloader be fore the new mode t akes effect.
Aut oloader Operation 109 S SL1 016 T ape Au toloader Refe rence Guide Set the Compression Note: T ypi cally yo u will wan t to leav e this option enabl e d unless y ou ar e backing up data that is already compr essed . Attempting t o compr ess compr essed data can r educe perfo rmance and increa se data siz e . T o set the compression: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Conf igurations . 2. If a checkmark appears in the box ne xt to Compression, compression is enabled. T o disable compression, c lick the box to remov e the checkmark. 3. If no checkmark app ears in the box next to Compression, com pression is disabled. T o enable compress ion, click the box to enter a checkmark. 4. Click submit. Fi gure 83: Setting the compr ession
Aut oloader Operati on 110 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Set the Cleaning M ode T o enable the Auto Clean function, you must ha ve a slot desi gnated for the cleaning tape cartridge. If you or another user hav e already designated a slot, that slotâ s number appears nex t to Cleaning Cartridge Location. If a slot has not been designated, the box is empty . Note: Aut o Clean is not support e d on W i ndo ws 2000 r emov able st orag e. T o set the cleaning tape slot: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Conf igurations . 2. From the drop-down list next to Cl eaning Cartridge Location, select the number of the slot in which you wa nt to s tore the cleaning cartridge. 3. Click submit. Figur e 84 : Cleaning T ape If you want to set the Auto Clean option, use the following proc edure. T o clean the tape dri ve manuall y , use the Move fu nction to load and unload the cleaning tape from the tape dri ve.
Aut oloader Operation 111 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide T o set Auto Clean: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Conf igurations . 2. If a checkmark appears in the box next to Enable Auto Clean, the option is enabled. T o disable Auto Clean, click the box to remo ve th e checkmark. If no checkmark appears in the box next to Enable Auto Clean, the option is disabled. T o enable Auto Clean, click the box to enter a checkmark. 3. Click submit. Note: A cleaning ta pe should be pr esent in t he cleaning tape slo t to confi gure A uto Clean . When Au to Clean is turned o ff , the cleaning tape is e jected to the mailsl ot.
Aut oloader Operati on 112 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Set the Import/Expor t Slot T o set the I/E slot: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Conf igurations . 2. If a checkmark appears in the box next to I/E Slot, the I/E slot is enabled. 3. If no checkmark appea rs in the box next to I/E Slot, the I/E slot is disabled. 4. Click submit. Figur e 85: Import/Expor t Slot Any change requires a po wer cycle of th e autoloader and reco nf iguration of the ISV software. If the autoloader is not po wer cycled: â The changes will not occur â The front panel red LED flashes and displays a âPlease power c ycleâ mes sage When the I/E slot is enabled, Slot 16 is designated as the I/E slot.
Aut oloader Operation 113 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Set Ethernet Configurations When you originally insta lled the autoloader , you set the Ethernet connections through the front panel. Ho we ver , you can chan ge them through the W eb Administration tool . T o change the Ethernet conf igurations: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Conf igurations . 2. On the secondary m enu, click Networking . The current settings a ppear on the screen. Figur e 86: N etworking options 3. If a checkmark appears in the box ne xt to DHCP , the dynamic IP address option is enabled. T o se t a permanent IP address: a. Click the box to remov e the checkmark. b . In the IP address f ields, type in the ne w address, using your T ab ke y to mov e from bo x to box. 4. If no checkmark app ears in the box next to DHCP , the perm anent IP address option is enabled. T o change a permanent IP address, in the IP address f ields, type in the ne w address, using your T ab key to move fro m box to box.
Aut oloader Operati on 114 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e 5. T o set the IP address from a permanent address to a dynamic address , click the box ne xt to DHCP , and delete the IP add ress from the IP address fields. 6. T o change the IP address of the su bne t mask, gatew ay , SNMP serv er , or the time server: a. Click the box to left of the addr ess you wa nt to change to enter a checkmark. b . T ype in the ne w address, using your T ab ke y to mov e from box to box. 7. Click submit. Note: If the pr eceding ste ps change the IP addr ess, the ne w addr ess must be en ter ed into the br o wser to contin ue using the W eb Administr ation fea tu r e.
Aut oloader Operation 115 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Set Security O ption When you enable the secur ity option, users must enter a passw o rd to access the autoloaderâ s functionality . A password allo ws either administrator-le vel access or operator -lev el access. (For more informatio n on le vels of pass word-protection, see âSecurity . â) T o set the security option: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Conf igurations . 2. On the secondary m enu, click Security . Figur e 87 : Security option 3. If a checkmark appears in the box next to Securi ty , the security option is enabled. T o disable the security op tion, click the box to remo ve the checkmark. If no checkmark appears in the box next to Security , the security option is disabled. T o enable the secu rity option, click the box to enter a checkmark. 4. Click submit.
Aut oloader Operati on 116 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Set P assw ords When you en ter your password on th e autoloader front panel, there is no associated username. Ho we ver , when you click any menu heading on the W eb Administrationâ s home page, W eb Administration prompts you for a username and password. In W eb Administration, you can set up to four usernames and IDs, which can include both alpha and numer ic characters. User names and IDs must be b etween four and sev en chara cters long. T o set a password: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Conf igurations . 2. On the secondary m enu, click Security . 3. From the drop-down list next to User T ype, select Adm inistrator or Operator . 4. In the Username f ield, enter a username. 5. In the Passw ord field, enter the passw ord. 6. In the V erify Password f i eld, re-enter the password. 7. Click submit. Y ou can reset the operator password for the front panel from W eb Administration. Ho wev er , you cannot reset the front panel administrator passwo rd this way . T o reset the front panel operator passw ord: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Conf igurations . 2. On the secondary m enu, click Security . 3. Click the box ne xt to Reset Front P anel Password. A checkmark appears. 4. Click submit.
Aut oloader Operation 117 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Update the Firm war e T o update the f irmware: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Updates . Figur e 88: G et s ystem updates 2. Click Br owse . 3. Navigate to the location of the f irmware update. 4. Click Submit. The autoloader automatical ly uploads the new code and updates the firmware. Note: A mes sage displays on the L CD to i ndicate that the update is complete . D o not pow er cycle the autoloader until this message display s.
Aut oloader Operati on 118 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e
119 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 5 T ape Dri v e Cl eaning Y our tape dri ve read/write head should be cleaned periodically . When cleaning is needed, the dri ve automatic ally requests the backup software to perform a cleaning operation. Ho we ver , you can also initiate cleaning fro m the front pa nel as needed. Use a cleaning tape to clean your tape dri ve. â The DL T1 tape cleaning tape looks just lik e a DL Ttape IV cartridge, e xcept that its shell is beige and has a stop ne xt to the door hinge to prev ent insertion in a non-compatible dri ve. â The SDL T cleaning tape is gray . â The Ultrium cleaning tape is orange. Note: See Chapte r 3, âT ape Cartr idge Usage , â fo r a list of compatible cleaning cartr id ges and part n umbers . Configuring the Cl eaning T ape Location Before inserting the cleaning tape yo u mu st configure the cleaning tape location. 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. 2. Press Enter . 3. Scroll to Cleaning T ape. 4. Press Enter . 5. Log in as Administrator . 6. Scroll to Cleaning T ape Location. 7. Press Enter . 8. Select an a vailable slot (no * next to the slot number).
T ape Dr iv e Cleaning 120 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e 9. Press Enter . The selected slot has a ! ne xt to the slot number . 10. T o deconfig ure the slot, press Enter again. The selected slot no longer has a ! next to the slot number . Inser ting the Cl eaning T ape There are two methods for inserting the cleaning tape: â Load the cle aning tape dire ctly into an ejected magazine and then reload the magazine. â Insert the cleaning tape through t he mailslot. T o insert the cleaning tape through the mailslot: 1. On the main menu , scroll to Command. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Command submenu, scrol l to Cleaning T ape. 4. Press Enter . 5. Log in as Operator . 6. On the Cleaning T ape submenu, scro ll to Enter Cleaning T a pe. 7. Press Enter . A countdo wn appears on the LCD. Y ou ha ve 20 seconds to insert the cleaning tape through the mailslot before it re locks. Push the car tridge in. When prompted, press Enter . The system accepts the tape. If you try to load a cleaning tape through the mail slot without ha ving config ured a cleaning slot, the autoloader rejects the tape. 8. Once you insert the cleaning tape th rough the mailslot, do one of the follo wing: â Proceed directly to manual cleaning. â Store the cleaning tape in a magazine slot to be used later . Storing the Cl eaning T ape When you st ore the cleaning tape, you can use it in the follo wing ways: â Use it for manual cleaning.
T ape Dr iv e Cleaning 121 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide â If the Auto Clean function is enabled, the autoloader can move the cleaning tape from the magazine slot to the tape dri ve and, after the cleaning cycle, return it to its slot. â If backup software cleaning function is enabled, the software can mo ve the cleaning tape from the magazine slot to the tape d riv e and, after the cleaning cycle, return it to its slot (for more information, see your backup softwareâ s documentation). T o store the cleaning tape: 1. After you ha ve inser ted the tape th rough the mailslot into the dri ve for cleaning, on the main menu , scroll to Conf iguration. 2. Press Enter . The Configuration submenu appe ars. 3. On the submenu, scroll to Cleaning T ape Location. 4. Press Enter . 5. Log in as Administrator . A map of all the magazine slo ts appears. Note: When a map o f the magazine slots a ppears on the displ ay , an aster isk (*) indi cates a slo t occu pied b y a dat a cartri dge , a (@) indi cates a slo t occu pied b y a cleaning cartri dge, and an (!) indicates an empty slot designated as cleaning slot . Figur e 89 : Magazine slot map 6. Scroll to the slot where you w ant to store the cleaning tape. Note: If yo u stor e the c leaning tape , you m ust spec ify in w hich slot the t ape is to be stor ed. Slot 1 Slot 2 * Slot 3 * Slot 4 * Slot 5 Slot 9 Slot 13 * Slot 6 S l ot 1 0 * Slot 14 * Slot 7 * S l ot 11* S l ot 1 5 * S l ot 8 * Slot 12 * S l ot 1 6 !
T ape Dr iv e Cleaning 12 2 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e 7. Press Enter to unload the cleaning tape from the dri ve. The autoloader mov es the tape to its new location. Ejec ting the C leaning T ape Y ou need to eject the cleaning tape fro m the autoloader under the follo wing conditions: â If you do not wan t to store the cleaning ta pe in a magazine slot after manually cleaning the tape dri ve. â If the cleaning tape has e xpired. A cleaning tape cartridge can be used for 20 cleanings. T o eject a cleaning tape: 1. On the main menu , scroll to Command. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Command submenu, scrol l to Cleaning T ape. 4. Press Enter . 5. Log in as Operator . 6. On the Cleaning T ape submen u, scroll to Eject Cleaning T ape. 7. Press Enter . The autolo ader ejects the cl eaning tape from the mailslot. T ape Driv e Cl eaning M ethods Y ou can clean your tape driv e in three ways: â Manual Cleaning â Auto Clean â Software Manual C leaning If neither Auto Clean nor the backup so ftwareâ s cleaning option are enabled and the dri ve requires cleaning, the autoloader displays a cle aning message on the LCD.
T ape Dr iv e Cleaning 12 3 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide Caution: Becau se the cleaning cartr idge is ab ra siv e, y ou should not u se it unless the cleaning message appears. T o clean the tape dri ve manually: 1. On the main menu , scroll to Command. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Command submenu, scrol l to Cleaning T ape. 4. Press Enter . 5. Log in as Operator . 6. On the Cleaning T ape submenu, scro ll to Load to Dri ve. 7. Press Enter . The autoloader mov es the cleaning tape fro m its slot to the tape dri ve and then cleans the driv e with it. When the cleaning is finished, you must return the cleaning tape to its magazine slot. 8. On the main menu , scroll to Command. 9. Press Enter . 10. On the Command submenu, scrol l to Cleaning T ape. 11. Press Enter . 12. Log in as Operator . 13. On the Cleaning T ape submen u, scroll to Unload from Dri ve. 14. Press Enter . The autolo ader remov es the clea ning tape from the tape dr i ve. 15. When you ha ve finished manually cleaning the tape dri ve, do one of the follo wing: â Store it to its magazine slot (see âStoring the Cleaning T apeâ). â Eject the cleaning tape from the auto loader (see âEjecting the Cleaning Ta p e â ) .
T ape Dr iv e Cleaning 12 4 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Auto C le an Note: Aut o Clean is not support e d on W i ndo ws 2000 r emov able st orag e. The Auto Clean function permits the auto loader to perform the cleaning pro c ess automatically without interrupting normal operation. The Auto Clean feature is turned of f by default. W ith Auto Clean enabled, the autoloader monitors the cleaning requirements of the tape driv e. When the driv e indicates a Cleaning Required status, the autoloader automatically remov es the cleaning cartrid ge from its slot and i nserts it into the tape dri ve. After completing the cleanin g c y cle, the autoloader returns the cleaning cartridge to its slot. When Auto Clean is enabled, the autoload er automatically cleans the tape dri ve when a Cleaning Required s tatus occurs . During the cleaning cycle, the LCD displays messages indicating the pro gress of the process: â Loading Cleaning Cartridge. The autoload er is loading the cleaning cartridge from its magazine slot into the t a pe dri ve. â Cleaning Dri ve. The cleaning cartridge is running in the tape dri ve. â Unloading Cleaning Cartridge. The autolo ader is returning the cleaning tape to its magazine slot. Note: If yo u enable Aut o Clean, mak e sur e th e clea ning opt ion in y our ba ck up softw are is tur ned off . Before you enable the Auto Clean option, you must desi gnate which slot contains the cleaning cartridge and load the cleaning cartridge into that slot. If you hav e not done this, the autoloader will not allow you to enable Auto Clean. T o set Auto Clean: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Conf iguration submen u, scroll to Cleaning T ape. 4. Press Enter . 5. Log in as Administration.
T ape Dr iv e Cleaning 12 5 S SL101 6 T ape A utoloader Ref erence Gui de 6. On the Cleaning T ape submen u, scroll to Au to Clean On/Off. If Auto Clean is enabled, the menu ite m appears as Auto Clean O n. If Auto Clean is disabled, it appears as Auto Clean Off. 7. T o change the settin g, press the up or do wn scroll ke y once. 8. Press Enter . Soft w are Set the cleaning option in your software ap pli cation (if av ailable) so that the software monitors dri ve cleaning. If your application software supports automatic cleaning, store a cleaning cartridge in the slot specif ied by the application. Note: If aut omatic cleaning is enab led in y our appli cation softwar e, mak e sur e the Auto Clean option is d isabled on the aut olo ader either vi a the L CD fr ont pan el or W eb Adm ini stration.
T ape Dr iv e Cleaning 12 6 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e
12 7 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide 6 T r oubl eshooting Befor e Contac ting T ec hnical Suppor t Before you contact technical su pport, use th e information in this chapter to try and resolve the problem. Problems with the autoloader ca n occur in the following forms: â Operational Problems â Error Messages Operational Pr oble ms Operational problems can range from co mpatibility issues wi th the operating system to failure of the front panel. Ta b l e 1 3 describes the probable cause and suggested action for each opera tional problem you may encounter . T able 13: Sugg ested Actions for Operational Pr obl ems Problem Probable Cause Suggested Actio n F r ont P anel doe s not displa y inf ormation . The connecti on to the LC D h a s f a i l e d . Use the W eb Adm in ist r at ion tool to tr oubleshoot the err or . The a utoloader did not po wer up . See, â Autoloader does no t po wer up . â Th e L CD ha s failed . R eplace the cha ssis assembly . Aut oloader is operating slo wl y . The au toloader is inco rr ect ly con fi gur ed f or the oper a ting sys te m. Go to the HP su pport web site fo r compatibility r e quirements: http: //www .hp .com Dr iv e is oper ating slo wl y . Dr iv e head is dirty . If the c leaning light is also on, clean th e dr iv e. Media is w orn o ut . T ry a ne w ta pe and discar d the older me dia .
Tr o u b l e s h o o t i n g 12 8 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Back up se r ve r isn't capabl e of sendi ng data to the dr ive f ast enough. F or the SDL T and Ultr ium dr iv es, the ba ck up serv er n e e d s to h av e lo t s o f me m o r y , pr ocessing po wer , a dedicated S CSI bus and a f ast fi l e s yst e m. Ne tw or k is su es . Mo st ne tw or k s ar en 't c ap ab le of sending data fast enough to the SDL T and Ultr ium dri ves. Ther efor e mu ltiple network s treams of data mu st be used f or bac k ups (concur rency .) Also look for high ne t wor k tr affi c, whi ch can aff e ct ba ck up/r esto re perf or mance . S CSI issues. Check t erminatio n, and cable length. Use L VDS SCSI and don't connect an y Single -Ended devi ces or terminat ors on the sam e bus as the autoloader . Ul tr a 160 is r ecom mended f or Ultrium 2 perf or mance . Back up so ft w are isn't conf igur ed optimally . Make sur e that the back up softwar e is c onf igured f or the best p erfo rmance . (Bloc k siz e at 64 and tur n softwar e compr essi on off). Data set is impairing perf or mance . Th e foll ow ing can lo w er perf ormance: l ots of small (<64k) f iles , fr agmen tatio n, and uncompr essible data . Re a l T i me C l o ck ke ep s g e t t i n g res e t / c l e a re d. Th e DL T1 and SDL T autolo ader versions cannot maintain the clock when power i s of f . Since the DL T1 and SDL T ver sio n s c a n n ot m ai nt ai n po wer to t he clock w hen pow er i s off or the autoloader is r eset, it is r ecommended to conf igur e these autol oaders to connect to a time serv er instead of manually setting the clock. T able 13: Sugg ested Actions for Operational Pr obl ems Problem Probable Cause Suggested Actio n
Tro u b l e s h o o t i n g 12 9 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Err or M essages Failures can occur while operating the au toloader . They pre v ent the autoloader from completing a specif ic ac tion. When a failure occurs , tw o things can happen: â No error message appears, but the autolo ader fails to complete the action. If no message appears, you will need to call a serv ice representati ve to troubleshoot the proble m. â An error message appears on the front panel or W eb Administration. If an error message appears, follo w the procedures listed in Ta b l e 1 4 to try and resolve the problem. Aut oloader does not pow er up . The powe r c ord o r sour ce is malfuncti oning or the autolo ader is inc orr ec tly conf igur ed. Chec k all outlets and po wer cor ds for pr oper connecti on. The power switc h on the back of th e autoloader is set to 0. F lip the pow er switc h on the back of the au toloader back to the | po sition and , if necessary , pre ss the pow er button on the fr ont o f the autoloader . Th e DCA is not f ully seated . Re se a t t h e D C A t o e n s ure a good connecti on to the chassis asse mbly . T able 13: Sugg ested Actions for Operational Pr obl ems Problem Probable Cause Suggested Actio n
Tr o u b l e s h o o t i n g 130 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Understanding Error Messag es When a failure f irst occurs , a two-digit error message appears on the front panel of the autoloader . See Ta b l e 1 4 for the error descriptio n and su ggested repair . When vie wing the error log fro m the front panel, the te xt that appears is similar to the follo wing: Task: Picker Error: 02b9202f Contxt: 03ac/00400100 POC: 00022 POH: 00000:07:41: #14 Find the eight characters following âError:â in the second line of the block of text. The third and fourth digits are the error code. In the example abov e, the error code is b9. In Ta b l e 1 4 , you will see that this is an error ev ent related to the picker . Note: POH is the time of t he err or w i th an a ssigned number . The higher t he err or number is, the mor e r ecent it is. If you need to vie w an error log from W eb Administrator , the text that appears is similar to the follo wing: 0014: PC: 00022 POH: 00000 : 0 7 : 41 Error: 02b9202f, Context: 03ac/00400100 070d02c7 : a70dfd3a : 0708000 a : 00000000 00000000 : 00000000 : 0000000 0 : 00000000 00000000 : 00000000 : 0000000 0 : 00000000 Find the eight characters follo wing âError:â in the first line of the block of text. The third and fourth digits are the error code. In the example abov e, the error code is b9. In Ta b l e 1 4 , you will see that this is an error ev ent related to the picker .
Tro u b l e s h o o t i n g 131 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide . T able 14 : Err or M essages Err or M essage Description Suggested Repa ir 00 - 25 Gener al softwar e fla gs â P ower cy cle the autoloader and r un the Heal th test . â Check HP w ebsite for f irm war e updates . 26 M e s s a g e S e n d I D err or â Check S CSI Bus ca bles and ter minators . â Make sur e the host bus adapter is installed , detected , and configur ed proper ly . â P ow er cyc l e au toloader . Repeat checks afte r pow er cycle . 2 7 Message bad â Check S C SI bus c ables and terminators. â Make sur e the host bus adapter is installed , detected , and configur ed proper ly . â P ow er cyc l e au toloader . Repeat checks afte r pow er cycle . 28 Message parameter bad â Che ck host device d r iver . â Make sur e the softwar e appli cation is supported , has the autoloader corr e ctly conf igured, and has the latest p atc h es install ed. â Check S C SI bus c ables and terminators. â Make sur e the host bus adapter is installed , detected , and configur ed proper ly . â P ow er cyc l e au toloader . Repeat checks afte r pow er cycle . 29 In vali d element â Che ck host device d r iver . â Make sur e the softwar e appli cation is supported , has the autoloader corr e ctly conf igured, and has the latest p atc h es install ed. â P ow er cyc l e au toloader . Repeat checks afte r pow er cycle .
Tr o u b l e s h o o t i n g 13 2 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e 2A In vali d element statu s â Che ck host device d r iver . â Make sur e the softwar e appli cation is supported , has the autoloader corr e ctly conf igured, and has the latest p atc h es install ed. â P ow er cyc l e au toloader . Repeat checks afte r pow er cycle . 2B- 2F F irm war e tables and stacks in vali d â P ower cy cle the autoloader and r un the Heal th test . â Update firm war e. â Change positi on of the f irm war e jumper t o enable secondary f irmw ar e i mage: 1. R emov e the DCA. (See Appendi x D for instru ctions.) 2 . Change the jumpers on the fr ont of the D CA fr om v ertical to hor i zon tal or hor iz ont al to ver t ic al. 3 . Install th e DCA. 4. P o wer on the autoloader and, if necessar y , attempt a f irm war e upgrade . 30 P ost F ailure â V erify th at the DC A and magazines ar e properl y seated . â P ower cy cle the autoloader . 31 - 38 S yste m Monitor ing ty pe e v en ts â P ower cy cle the autoloader and r un the Heal th test . â Check HP w ebsite for f irm war e updates . 39 O ff l i n e N o a c ti o n re q ui red . 3A Door loc ked No ac tion r equir ed. 3B Open fr ont â Install maga zine or maga zine bla nk . â T ry a differ ent magazine or magazine blank. T able 14 : Err or M essages Err or M essage Description Suggested Repa ir
Tro u b l e s h o o t i n g 13 3 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 3C Ov er tem p â V erif y that room temperature is w i thin specif ications. â Check that the re is adequate c learance for airf low . â Clear debr i s f rom an y op enings of the aut oloader , both in the fron t a nd the back. â V erify t hat both f a ns ar e wo rking . If fans ar e bad, contact HP cu stomer supp ort . â P ower off the autoloader and allow it to co ol . 3D Dr ive er r or T r y a differ ent piece of media . If that a lso f ai ls, contac t HP cu stomer suppo rt. 3E Load err or â V erify y ou ar e using the cor rect ty pe of media . â V erify cartr idge doe s not hav e labels or oth er matter placed an ywher e on the cartr idge e xcept whe re la bels are e xpected to be pla c ed . â T ry to load a differ ent pi e ce of media . If multiple pi eces of media f ail, con tact HP cu stomer su pport. 3F Unload er ro r â V erify cartr idge doe s not hav e labels or oth er matter placed an ywher e on the cartr idge e xcept whe re la bels are e xpected to be pla c ed . â T ry to load a differ ent pi e ce of media . If multiple pi eces of media f ail, con tact HP cu stomer su pport. 60 - 6 9 Internal com mu nica tion eve nt s P ower cy cle the autoloader . A0 - A4 P ic ker servo er r ors â Ru n Pic ke r te s t. â R u n Health test . â If pr oblem continues, po wer cy cle the au toloader and r epe at the tests . T able 14 : Err or M essages Err or M essage Description Suggested Repa ir
Tr o u b l e s h o o t i n g 134 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide A5 Source element empty â V erify that the e xpected sour ce r e all y does hav e a cartri dge. â R u n the He alth test. â If the sour ce is a magazine , replace the cartr idge in that slot w i th a differ ent cartr idge and try aga in . If e rro r c o nt i n u e s, re p l a c e t h e ma g a z i n e. â If sour ce is the t ape dri v e, v er ify the ta pe dri ve ha s a cartri dge and it w as ejec ted. â P ower cy cle the autoloader . â If err or continues , contact HP customer support . A6 Source magazine missing â V erify the magazine is in stalled corr ectly into the autoloader . â Rem ove and insert the magazine again. â R u n the He alth test. â T ry a differ ent magazine or magazine blank. â P ower cy cle the autoloader . â R eplace the magazine . A7 Destinati on maga z ine missing â V erify the magazine is in stalled corr ectly into the autoloader . â Rem ove and insert the magazine again. â R u n the He alth test. â T ry a differ ent magazine or magazine blank. â P ower cy cle the autoloader . â R eplace the magazine . T able 14 : Err or M essages Err or M essage Description Suggested Repa ir
Tro u b l e s h o o t i n g 13 5 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide A8 Dest ination element ful l â V erify the e xpe ct e d destination really does not have a cartr id ge. â If destination is a maga zine, install and r emov e a cartri dge fr om the selected slot and try again. If e rro r c o nt i n u e s, re p l a c e t h e ma g a z i n e. â If desti nation is the tape d r iv e ver ify the tape dri ve does not have a cartridge . â If a cartri dge is in the mailslot opening , rem ov e it and ve rify that the mailslot door is closed . â P ower cy cle the autoloader . â Set the autoloa der to Ho me us ing W eb Adminis trati on , Command page. â R u n the He alth test. â If err or continues , contact HP customer support . A9 P ic ker f ull â Look in the fr ont of the autoloader and con f i rm the picker i s ful l. â P ower cy cle the autoloader . â R u n the He alth test. â Set the autoloa der to Ho me us ing W eb Adminis trati on , Command page. â Contact HP c ustomer support if the pr oblem continues and pr e vents normal oper ations . AA P ic ker cartr idge sensor err or â Pe r f o r m p i c k e r t e s t . â P erf orm the Health test . â If problem pre vents th e test fr om runn ing, contact HP cu stomer suppo rt. AB Dr iv e path senso r err or â R u n the He alth test. â P ower cy cle the autoloader . A C Mai l slot do or sen sor err or â In sert a ca rtridge i nto th e autolo ader vi a the mai l slot . â P ower cy cle the autoloader . T able 14 : Err or M essages Err or M essage Description Suggested Repa ir
Tr o u b l e s h o o t i n g 13 6 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e AD Mail slot sol enoid err or â In sert a ca rtridge i nto th e autolo ader vi a the mai l slot . â P ower cy cle the autoloader . AE Unkno wn serv o err or R u n the He alth test. AF Er ror l og inf ormati on eve nt No acti on r equir ed. B 0 - B F E rro r ev en t s re l a te d to th e picker n ot rot a t i n g o r tr anslating corr ectl y . â R u n the Pi cker test . â R u n the He alth test. â P ower cy cle the autoloader . C0 Unkno wn mot or err or â R u n the He alth test. â P ower cy cle the autoloader . D0 Ma ga zi ne solenoid bad â Re move a nd i n se r t e a ch m a gaz i ne. â T ry a differen t magazine, if possible . â P ower cy cle the autoloader . D1 Maga zine pr esent sensor bad â Re move a nd i n se r t e a ch m a gaz i ne. â T ry a differen t magazine, if possible . â P ower cy cle the autoloader . T able 14 : Err or M essages Err or M essage Description Suggested Repa ir
Tro u b l e s h o o t i n g 13 7 S SL1 016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide If you still hav e a question after reading this guide, see âGetting Help, â in the preface. D2 - D4 P osition se nsor bad â Re move a nd i n se r t e a ch m a gaz i ne. â T ry a differen t magazine, if possible . â P ower cy cle the autoloader . D5 - DE Cartri dge flags located on the maga z ine ma y be bad or the sensor to detect the flag s m a y have a pr oblem â Re move a nd i n se r t e a ch m a gaz i ne. â T ry a differen t magazine, if possible . â P ower cy cle the autoloader . DF Jammed cartr id ge â Look thr ough the mail slot door and ver ify a cartr i dge is j ammed . If a cartr idg e is jamm ed, pow er cyc le the autoloader . â If a cartri dge is still jammed , pow er down and unplug the aut olo ader . R e mo ve the opp osite maga z ine that is jammed. Car efull y try to push th e cartr idg e forw ar d into th e maga zine slot . T her e may be a need to slightly r otate the pick er to get the cartri dge to mov e forwar d . P ow er back up , install the remo ved maga z ine and run the H ealth test. â If the cartr idge cannot be unj ammed, r emo ve the S CSI, Ethe rnet , and pow er cabl es fr om the autol o ader and r emov e the au toloader fr om the cabinet . With the autoloader r esting flat on a table , remov e the top c over and sl ide or remove the jammed c artri dge. R e assemble the autoloader and pri or to reinstalling the autoloader in th e cabinet , run t he He al th te st from t he front pa nel. â If the same cartr idge jams , r emo ve it fr om the s ystem a s a bad cartr idge . V er ify ther e ar e no fore ig n l abe ls o r st ickers on the ca rtridg e. â If the au toloa der a lw ays ja ms g oing to or fr om the same magazine , replace the maga zine. â If jam is random , contact HP customer support . T able 14 : Err or M essages Err or M essage Description Suggested Repa ir
Tr o u b l e s h o o t i n g 138 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Diagnostic T ests Ta b l e 1 5 lists the diagnostic tests. T able 15: Diagnostic T ests Te s t Description Halt Cance ls any c urr en tly r unning tes t. Self â Checks the abilit y of the pi cker to pr operl y r otate and tr anslate . â V er ifi es that installe d magazine s functi on cor rectl y . Health â Ve r i f i e s p i c k e r m o v e m e n t . â V erif ies magazine mo vement . â Updates i n ventory . â V erif ies a bility to mov e cartr idge to and f rom eac h magazine element. â V er ifi es dri ve co mmunicati on and ab ility to mo ve a cartri dge to and fr om the dr iv e. â V erif ies that a cartr idge can be mov e d to and fr om the mail slot . Pic k e r â P erfor ms a full p ick er tr anslation calibr ati on. â P erfor ms a full p ick er r ota tion calibr ation . Mag az ine â P erforms left and ri ght magazine calibration. â V er ifies su ccessful sl ot mov emen t. In ven tory T ake s a snapsho t of the c urr ent la bels r ecor ded for ea ch cartr idg e pr esent , t hen perf orms an d inv ent ory and comp are s the new results to the snaps hot . Dr iv e Read/W r ite P erfor ms a wr ite of two f ull trac ks of data foll owed b y a r e ad and if t he dr iv e is capabl e perfo rms a com par e on the dat a. V erif ies the w rite/r ead statisti cs to determine if ther e is a wr ite or r ead problem w ith the dr iv e. Caution: R un ning this test may ov er wr ite ex isti ng data on the tape . Do not us e a tape cont aining curr ent or c riti cal data.
139 S SL101 6 T ape A utoloader Ref erence Gui de A Reg ula tor y C omp li an ce Notices F ed er al Communications Commission Notice Part 15 of the Federal Communica tions Commission (FCC) Rules and Regulations has established Radio Frequenc y (RF) emission limits to provide an interference-free radio frequenc y spectrum . Many electr onic devices, including computers, generate RF energ y inc ident al to their intended function and are, therefore, cov ered by these rules. These rules place computers and related peripheral de vices into two classes, A and B, d epending upon their intended installation. Class A de vices are those th at may reasonably be e xpected to be installed in a b u siness or commercial en vironment. Class B de vices are those that may reasonably b e e xpe cted to be insta lled in a residential en vironment (that is, personal computers). The FCC requires de vices in both classes to bear a label indicating the interference potential of th e de vice as well as additional operating instructions for the user . The rating label on the de vice shows which cl ass (A or B) the equipment falls into. Class B de vices hav e an FCC logo or FCC ID on the label. Class A de vices do not hav e an FCC logo or FCC ID on the la bel. Once the class of the de vice is determined, refer to the follo wing correspon ding statement. Class A Equipment This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to P a rt 15 of th e FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harm ful interference when the equipment is operated in a comme rcial en vironment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency ener gy and, if no t installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful in terference to radi o communications. Operation of this equipment in a resi dential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at personal expense.
Regula tory Com pliance Notice s 140 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Class B Equipm ent This equipmen t has been tested and fo und to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to P a rt 15 of th e FCC Rules. These limits are designed to pro vide reasonable protection ag ainst harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energ y and, if not installed and used in accordance with th e instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio co mmunicati ons. Howe ver , there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmfu l interference to radio or tele vision reception, which can be determined by turning the equipmen t of f and on, the user is en couraged to try to correct the interference b y one or more of the following measures: â Reorient or relocate the recei ving antenna. â Increase the separa tion between the equipment and recei ver . â Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit dif ferent from that to which the recei ver is co nnected. â Consult the dealer or an e xperienced ra dio or televi sion technician for help. Mod ifi cat ions The FCC requires the user to be notified th at any changes or mod ifications made to this de vice that are not e xpressly approved by Hewlett-P ackard Company may vo id the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables Connections to this de vice must be made with shielded cables with metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods in order to ma intain compliance wi th FCC Rules and Regulations.
Regula tory Compliance Noti ces 141 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Dec lar ation of Conformity for produc ts mark ed with th e FCC logo - United States only This de vice complies with P art 15 of th e FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the follo wing two conditions: (1) this de vice may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this de vic e must accept any interferenc e recei ved, including interference that may cause und esired operation. For questions re garding this FCC declaration, contact: He wlett-Packard Company Regulatory Engineer , MS E-200 825 14th S treet S.W . Lov eland, CO 8053 7 Or , call (970) 898-1738 T o identify this product, refer to the Pa rt, Series, or Model number found on the product. Canadian Notice (Av is Canadien) Class A Equipment This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Eq uipment Regul ations. Cet appareil numérique de la classe A resp ecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada. Class B Equipm ent This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Eq uipment Regul ations. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B re specte toutes les ex igences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
Regula tory Com pliance Notice s 14 2 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Eur opean Union Notice Products bear ing the CE marking comply with the EMC Directiv e (89/336/EEC) and the L ow V oltage Directi ve (73/23 /EEC ) issued by the Co mmission of the European Community and if this product has telecommunicatio n functionality , the R&TTE Directi ve (1999/5/EC). Compliance with these directi ves implies conformity to the following European Norms (in parentheses are the equi valent international standa rds and re gulations): â EN 55022 (CISPR 22) - El ectromagnetic Interference â EN55024 (IEC61000 -4-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 11) - Electromag n etic Immunity â EN61000-3-2 (IE C61000-3-2) - Po wer Line Harmonics â EN61000-3-3 (IE C61000-3-3 ) - Po wer Line Flicker â EN 60950 (IEC 60950) - Prod uct Safety BSM I No ti ce
Regula tory Compliance Noti ces 143 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Japanese Notice
Regula tory Com pliance Notice s 144 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e
14 5 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide B Elec trostatic Discharge T o prev ent damage to the system, be a ware of the precautions you need to follow when setting up the system or handling part s. A discharge of stat ic electricity from a f i nger or other conductor ma y damage system boards or oth er static-sensiti ve de vices. This type of damage may reduce the life expectanc y of the de vice. T o prev ent electrostatic damage, observe the following precautions: â A v oid hand contact by transp orting and storing products in static-safe containers. â K eep electrostatic-sensitiv e parts in their containers until the y arriv e at static-free workstations. â Place parts on a grounded surface before removing them from their containers. â A void touching pins, leads, or circuitry . â Alway s be properly grounded when touching a static-sensiti ve co mponent or assembly .
Electr ost atic Disc harge 146 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Gr ounding M et hods There are sev eral methods for grounding. Use one or more of the following methods when handling or installin g electrostatic-sensiti ve parts: â Use a wrist strap connected b y a ground cord to a grounded workstation or computer chassis. Wrist straps are fl e xible straps with a minimum of 1 megohm ± 10 percent resistance in th e ground cords. T o provide proper grounding, we ar the strap snug against the skin. â Use heel straps, toe straps, or boot straps at standing workstations. W ear the straps on both feet when stand ing on conducti ve floors or dissipating floor mats. â Use conducti ve f ie ld service tools. â Use a portable f ield service kit with a folding static-dissipating work mat. If you do not have an y of th e suggested equip ment for proper grounding , ha ve an authorized reseller install the part. Note: F or more infor mation on static electr ic it y , or for assistance with pr o duct installation , contact y our autho ri z ed re seller .
14 7 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide C Spec ifications Ph ysical Specifications P er f ormance Spec ifications T able 16 : Phy sical Specifications Height 3 .5 inches (8.8 9 cm) Wid th 17 .6 inches ( 4 4.7 0 cm) Length 2 7 .6 7 inch es ( 7 0.2 8 cm) W eight ( w ithout media) 50 l b (22 .68 kg) T able 17 : P erformance Specifications Initializ e el ement status 90 second s (typical) Mean cartr idge cy cle time 20 seconds Mean cartr idge loa d time 10 seconds Av g load time (af ter placing cartridge in driv e) 5 9 sec on ds (t ypica l) Max transfer rate DL T1: 3 MB/sec (nati ve) SDL T 320: 16 MB/sec (nati ve) Ultr ium 460: 30 MB/sec (nativ e) Maximum Storage Capacit y DL T1: 12 80 GB (comp re ssed) SDL T 320: 5120 GB (comp ressed) Ultr ium 460: 6400 GB (compr essed) Note: Assumes typ ical 2:1 com pr ession of dat a. Actu al compr ession ma y vary , depending on t ype of data be ing bac ked u p.
Spe cification s 148 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e P ow er Spec ifications T able 18: P o wer Spec ifications Li ne V o lt ag e 6 0 H z sys te m : 90 to 2 65 V A C; 50 H z syst em : 90 to 135 V A C Li ne fre q ue nc y 4 7 Hz to 6 3 Hz AC input curr ent 60 Hz s ystem : 6 .0A (RMS) f or 115V A C; 50 H z syst em : 3. 0 A (RMS) for 2 30V A C P o wer consump tion 60 Hz s ystem : 7 5W ; 50 H z syst em : 80 W Line discontinuities: V oltage surges /- 500 v olts at nominal line vo ltage P ulse w idt h: 100 ns R ise Time: 5 ns R epetition Ra te: 1 Hz Commo n and diff er enti al mode, po sitiv e and negative polar i ty Line discontinuities: V oltage spikes /- 1. 5 kV at n ominal line v olt age P ulse Wi dth: 1 micr osecond R ise Time: 25 ns R epetition r ate: 1 Hz Commo n and diff er enti al mode, po sitiv e and negative polar i ty
Spe cification s 14 9 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide En vir onm ental Specifications Acoustic and Noise L imits T able 19: Env ironmental Specifications T emperature R ang e (Dry Bulb) Oper ating 10ºC to 35ºC ( 5 0 ºF to 9 5ºF) Non-oper ating - 35ºC t o 65ºC (-31ºF t o 1 4 9ºF) T emperature V ariation Oper ating 10ºC (50ºF) per hour Non- Oper ating 20ºC (68ºF) per hour Humidity Oper ating 20% to 80% non-condensing Non- Operating 10 % to 90% non- condensing Gr ad ien t 10% per hour W et Bulb Oper at ing 2 6ºC ( 7 8.8ºF) m ax Non-Operating 29ºC (84.2ºF ) max Altitude Oper ating -500 to 10, 000 feet (-15 2 to 3, 048 meter s) Non-Operating -500 t o 30, 000 feet (-15 2 to 9 ,144 meters) T able 20: Aco ustic and Noise Limits Specifica tion Operating Storage or Non-operating T ransportat ion Acou stics Idle: not to e xceed 5 5 dbA F ull oper ation: no t to e xceed 60 dB A N/A N/A
Spe cification s 150 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Safety and Regulatory The autoloader carries the follo wing Re gulatory Agency product safety certifi c ations. T able 21: Regulator y and Product Safet y Certifications Descripti on Specification UL L i sted Mar k UL 195 0 (standard f or safety of inf ormati on technology equipment) TUV GS Mark (Ge rman y) E N609 50, IE C95 0 (standard f or safety of info rmation tec hnology equipment thir d edition) CE Marking (E u r opean Union) Lo w V oltage Direc tive , 7 2/2 3/EEC, Eur opean Union CUL Mark (Canadi an UL) CAN/C SA 2 2 .2 No . 95 0 (standard f or safe t y of info rmation tec hnology equipment) R e gulat ory Ser ies ID Number ED2000, Class B
151 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide D Upgr ading or Replacing t he DCA This appendix describes ho w to upgrade or replace the driv e carrier assembly (DCA). Configuration and T ools If you replace or upgrade the autoloader DCA, you need to check settings for the DCA and the SCSI b us. Y ou will need a Phillips scre wdriv er to replace a DCA. Remo v ing a DCA Before you replace the autoloader DCA, yo u must mak e sure the tape dri ve does not contain a cartridge. T o unload a tape from the tape dri ve, see âMo ve a Single Cartridgeâ or âEject a Sing le Cartridgeâ in Chapter 4. Y ou must also turn of f power to the auto loader and disconnect the po wer and SCSI cables from the back of the DCA. Caution: Th e DCA contains e lectroni c sensitiv e components. Be sur e to w ear your wr i st g r o und strap wh enever ha ndl in g th e DC A.
Upgrading or Replac i ng the DCA 15 2 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e T o re move th e D CA : 1. Po wer off the autoloader . 2. Disconnect all cords and cables from the back of the DCA. 3. Remov e the four screws anchoring the DCA to the chassis. Figur e 90: Removi ng t he screw s o n the rear of the c hassis
Upgr ading or Repl acing the DCA 15 3 S SL101 6 T ape A utoloader Ref erence Gui de 4. W ith one hand, grasp the DCA handle an d slide it backward to remo ve. Being careful not to touch the exposed board on the bottom of the DCA, place your other hand under the DCA to supp ort it and prev ent it from falling. Figur e 91: Removing the DCA Caution: A v oid t ouching t he expo sed board on the bottom o f the DCA. See Fi g u r e 92 .
Upgrading or Replac i ng the DCA 154 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Figur e 92: Bottom of DCA
Upgr ading or Repl acing the DCA 15 5 S SL101 6 T ape A utoloader Ref erence Gui de Installing a DCA T o install a DCA: 1. Put on gr ound wrist strap and co nnect to appropriate ground . 2. Grasp the DCA by the handle with on e hand and support it undernea th with the other hand. Caution: A v oid t ouching th e expos ed PCB A on the bott om of the DCA. 3. Slide the DCA into the DCA bay 1 . Make sure you position DCA corr ectly; it should slide smoothly . Figur e 93: Installing the DCA 4. Install the four scre ws that secure the DCA to the chassis 2 . T ighten firmly . 5. Make sure the po wer switch on the back of the DCA is off (t he 0 is pressed), then connect the power cord and SCSI cable. 6. On the power switch on the back of the DCA, press th e | to po wer on the autoloader . 1 2 2
Upgrading or Replac i ng the DCA 15 6 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e
15 7 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide index Index Index A altitude 149 authorized reseller, HP 13 auto clean 124 autoloader front view 15 internal view 20 IP address 47 rear view 18 status 89 status messages 90 C cartridges ejecting 80 inserting into mailslot 78 inserting single 77 moving 79 using 77 cleaning auto 124 manual 12 2 cleaning tape ejecting 122 inserting 120 storing 120 configuration menu 41 control mode, setting 44 conventions document 10 equipment symbols 11 text symbols 10 cooling fans 18 D daisy chaining 38 date, setting 55 DCA described 20 installing 155 removing 151 replacing 151 default password 76 , 100 document conventions 10 E element st atus 92 equipment symbols 11 error messages 129 Ethernet configurin g 47 connector 19 view information 95 ethernet connection 38 European Union Notice 142
Inde x 15 8 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Gui de F fans, cooling 18 firmware updating 97 view version 91 front panel components 73 default password 76 function keys 16 , 73 G getting help 13 H handles, rackmount, installing 30 height rackmount 147 help, obtaining 13 HP authorized reseller 13 storage website 13 technical support 13 humidity 149 I installation location 25 preparatio n 23 rackmount 27 SCSI bus requirements 23 standalone 34 verification 40 IP address dynamic, setting 48 setting permanent 49 IP gateway 50 L LCD 16 , 74 LEDs defined 74 status 17 length rackmount 147 logout 76 M magazine changing orientation 87 illustrated 17 installing 83 unloading 81 mailslot described 16 inserting cartridg e 78 P password default 76 , 100 lost 59 setting 57 performance problems 127 picker 20 power AC plug 18 switch 17 switching on 38 R rack stability, warning 12
Inde x S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 15 9 S SCSI bus require ments 23 cabl e requiremen ts 24 connection 36 connector 19 ID setting 42 switch 42 terminator requ irements 24 security, configuring 56 sequential mode operation 46 set compression 96 , 97 SNMP server 51 status information 88 subnet mask 49 symbols in text 10 symbols on equipment 11 T tape cartri dges inspecting 63 protecting 67 storing 68 transporting 68 tape drive cleaning 122 status 93 version 94 technical support, HP 13 temperature non-operating 149 operating 149 text symbols 10 time server 52 time, changing 53 time, setting 55 U updating firmware 97 W warning rack stability 12 symbols on equipment 11 Web Administration accessing 99 default password 100 websites HP storage 13 weight rackmount 147 width rackmount 147 write-protect sw itch 69
Inde x 160 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Gui de
© 2003 He wlett-P ack ard Com pany . Hewlett-P ac kar d Company mak es no w a r ranty of any kind with r egard to this materi al, including, but not limited to, the impli ed w arr anties of mer chanta bility and f itness for a partic ular purpose . Hew let t-P ackar d shall not be lia ble for err or s contained her ein or for inc idental or consequen tial damages in connectio n w ith the f urnishing, perf ormance , or use of th is m aterial. This do cument co ntains pr oprietary information, which is pr otected b y copy ri ght. No part o f this document ma y be photocopied, repr oduc ed, or translated into another lan gua ge without the prior wr itten consent of Hewlett-P ack ard. The inf ormati on contained in this document is sub ject to change w ithout notice . Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows NT® are U.S . registe r e d trade marks of Microsoft Corp oration. Or acle® is a regis tered U .S . trade mark of Or acle Cor porati on, R edwood C it y , Califor nia. UNIX® is a r egistered tr ademar k of T he Open Grou p. Solar is⢠a tr ademark of Sun Mi cr osy stems in the U .S . and other countri es. He wlett-P ack ar d Com pany shall not be liabl e f or technical or editori a l er ror s or o missions contained here in. The infor mation is pr ov ided â a s is â without w arr anty of any kind and is subj ect to change witho ut notice . The war ran ties fo r He wlett-P ack ard Com pany pr oducts ar e set f orth in the expr ess limited warr anty statements f or such products . Nothing her ein sho uld be construed as cons tituting an additional w arr anty . S SL1016 T ape A utol oader R efe rence Gu ide F ourt h Editi on (J une 2003) P art Number : 2 7 2 36 3-004
3 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide contents Contents About this Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Document Conventio ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Text Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Equipment Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Rack Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 HP Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 HP Storage Website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 HP Authorized Reseller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Mailslot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 On/Off Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Cooling Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 AC Power Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 SCSI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 9 DCA Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Internal View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Picker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 DCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Barcode Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Supported Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Content s 4 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e 2 Installation and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 SCSI Bus Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 SCSI Cable and Terminator Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 SCSI Cable Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Installation Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Required Tools and Hardware for Rack mount Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Rackmounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Removing the Autoloader From the Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Standalone Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 SCSI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Daisy Chaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 SCSI ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Sequential Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Autoloader IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 IP Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 SNMP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Time Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Set Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Set Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Lost Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 3 Tape Cartridge Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Tape Cartridges Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Tape Cartridge Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 3 Inspecting Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Protecting Tape Cartridges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Content s 5 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Transporting Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Storing Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Using the Write-Protect Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 DLT IV Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 SDLT 320 Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Ultrium Data Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 4 Autoloader Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Front Panel Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Front Panel Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Setting Passwords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Default Front Panel Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Using Data Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Inserting a Single Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Moving a Single Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Ejecting a Single Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Removing a Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Installing a Magazine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Inserting and Removing Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Manually Removing a Magazine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Changing the Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Viewing Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Autoloader Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 View Firmware Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 View Element Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 View Tape Drive Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 View Tape Drive Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 View Ethernet Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Run Inventory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Set Data Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Update Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 7 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Import/Export Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 7 Web Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Default Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Content s 6 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e View Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Move Tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Run Inventory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Set to Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Run Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Set the System Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Change the SCSI ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Set the Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Set the Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Set the Cleaning Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Set the Import/Export Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Set Ethernet Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Set Security Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Set Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Update the Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 5 Tape Drive Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Configuring the Cleaning Tap e Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Inserting the Cleaning Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 20 Storing the Cleaning Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 20 Ejecting the Cleaning Tape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 22 Tape Drive Cleaning Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Manual Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Auto Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 6 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Before Contacting Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Operational Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Understanding Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 A Regulatory Compliance Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Federal Communications Commission No tice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Class A Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Class B Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Content s 7 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo - United States only141 Canadian Notice (Avis Canadien) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Class A Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Class B Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 European Union Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 42 BSMI Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Japanese Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 B Electrostatic Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Grounding Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 C Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 7 Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Acoustic and Noise Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 49 Safety and Regulatory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 D Upgrading or Replacing the DCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Configuration and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Removing a DCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Installing a DCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Content s 8 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e
9 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide about this guide About this Guide About this Guide This reference guide provides information to help you: â Install and configure the autoloader â Properly use and maintain tape cartridges â Operate the autoloader â T roubleshoot the autoloader â Upgrade or replace Customer Replaceable Units About this Guide topics include: â Con ventions , page 1 0 â Rack Stability , page 12 â Getting Help , page 13
Abou t th is Gu ide 10 S SL1016 T ape Au toloade r Ref er ence Guide Con ventions Con ventions consist of the following: â Document Con v entions â T ext Symb ols â Equipment Symb ols Docum ent Conv entions The document co n ventions inclu ded in Ta b l e 1 apply in most ca ses. Tex t Sy m b o l s The follo wing symbols may be found in th e text of this guide. The y hav e the follo wing meanings. WA R N I N G : T e x t set off in this manner indicates that failure t o f ol lo w dir ections in th e warning co uld r esult in bodily harm or l oss of life . T able 1: Doc ument Conventions Element Convention C ro ss - re fe re n c e l i n k s Fi g u r e 1 K e y and fi eld name s, men u items, buttons, and dialog box titles Bold F il e nam es, appl ication nam es, a nd text emphasis Itali cs Use r input , comman d and dir ectory names, and sy stem r esponses ( output and messages) Monospace font COMMAND NAMES ar e upper case monospace font unless the y a r e case sensi ti ve Va r i a b l e s <monospace, italic font> W ebsite addr esses Underlined sans ser if font te xt: http: //www .hp .com
Abou t th is Gu ide S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 11 Caution: T e xt set off in this manner indi cates that f ailure t o follo w directi ons could r esult in damage to equip ment or data . Note: T e xt set off in this manner pr esen ts commen tar y , sideli ghts, or inte resting po ints of i nformat ion. Equipment S ymbols The following equipment symbols may be foun d on hardware for which this guide pertains. They ha ve the follo wing meanings. An y encl osed surface or ar ea o f the equipment mar ked w ith thes e s ymbols indi cates the p re sence of electr ic al shock ha zar ds. Enclosed ar ea contains no oper ator servicea ble parts. WA R N I N G : T o r educe the r isk of injury fr om elec tri cal shock haz ar ds, do not op en this en closur e. An y R J- 4 5 r eceptacle marked with these sy mbol s indicates a net wor k interf ace connection . WA R N I N G : T o r educe the r isk of electr ical shock , fir e , or damage to the equipment , do not plug telephone or tele com mun icat ions con nec tors into this r e ceptac l e . An y surface or ar ea of t he equipment mar ked w ith thes e sy mbols indi cates th e pre sence of a h ot surfa ce or hot comp onent . Con tact w ith this surf ace could r esult in inj ur y . WA R N I N G : T o r educe the r isk of injury fr om a hot com ponent , allow the surface t o cool befor e tou ching.
Abou t th is Gu ide 12 S SL1016 T ape Au toloade r Ref er ence Guide P ow er suppli es or s yst ems mark ed with t hese s ymbols indi cate the pr esence of m ultiple sour ces of po wer . WA R N I N G : T o r educe the r isk of injury f rom el ectri cal shock , r emov e all powe r cor ds to completel y disconn ect pow er fr om the po wer su pplie s and s y stems . An y pr od uct or assemb ly mark ed with these s ymb ols indicates th at the component e xceeds the r ecomm ended we ight f or one indiv idual to handle sa fel y . WA R N I N G : T o r educe the r isk of per sonal injury or damage to the equipment , observe local occupati ona l health and safety requir ements and guidelin es f or ma nually handling mater ial. Rack Stability Rack stability protects personal and equipment. WA R N I N G : T o r educe t he risk o f perso nal injury or damag e to the equipment , be sure that: â The lev eling jac k s ar e e x tended to the floor . â The f ull we ight of the r ack r ests on the le veling j acks. â In si ngle rac k installations, the stab i li z ing feet are attached to the ra ck. â In multiple r ack inst allations, the r ac k s ar e coupled . â Only one ra ck componen t is ext ended at an y time. A r ac k may becom e unstabl e if mor e than one r ack componen t is extended f or any r eason .
Abou t th is Gu ide S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 13 Getti ng Hel p If you still hav e a question after reading th is guide, contact an HP authorized service provider or access our website: ht tp://w ww .h p .com . HP T echnical Suppor t In North America, call tech nical support at 1-800-652-6672, a v ailable 24 hours a day , 7 d ays a week. Note: F or contin uou s quality impr o vemen t , calls may be r ecor ded or m onitor ed . Outside North America, call technical supp ort at the nearest location. T elephone numbers for worldwide technical suppor t are listed on the HP website under support: http://ww w .hp .com/sup p ort . Be sure to ha ve the follo wing information av ailable before calling: â T echnical support registration number (if applicable) â Product serial nu mbers â Product model names and nu mbers â Applicable error messages â Operating system type and re vision le vel â Detailed, specif ic questions HP Stor age W ebsite The HP website has the latest information on this product, as wel l as the latest dri vers. Access storage at: ht tp://w ww .h p .com . From this website, select the appropriate product or solution. HP Author ized R eseller For the name of your nearest HP authorized reseller: â In the United States, call 1-8 0 0-345-15 18 â In Canada, call 1-800-26 3-5868 â Else whe re, see the HP website for locations and telephone numbers: ht tp :/ /ww w . hp .co m .
Abou t th is Gu ide 14 S SL1016 T ape Au toloade r Ref er ence Guide
15 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 1 Over v iew The HP StorageW orks SSL1016 T ape Autoloa der pro vides a compact, high-capacity , low cost solution for si mple, unattended data backup. The autoloader supports one DL T1, SDL T 320, or Ultrium 460 tape dri ve and tw o remov able magazines. Each magazine can accommodate up to eight cartridges. Fro nt Vi ew The mailslot, LCD, function ke ys, status LEDs, On/Off button, and left and right magazines are visible on the front panel of the autoloa der . Figure 1: Autoload er fr o nt vie w 1 Left m agazine 5 Fu n c t io n k eys 2 Mail slo t 6 LC D 3 Stat us LE Ds 7 On/Off bu tton 4 Rig h t m a g az i n e 1 7 2 6 3 4 5
Ove r vi ew 16 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Mai ls lo t The autoloader has a manual entry port, th e mailslot, which allo ws you to load or unload a single cartridge. T o maintain security , the mailslot can be password protected. Provided that the tape dri ve is empty , a cartridge can be inserted in the mailslot e ven if both maga zines are completely f illed. LC D The LCD allo ws you to use the scrolling menu to perform diagnostics and to enter commands. Fun c t io n Key s The function ke ys allow you to mo ve th rough the scrolling menu and to make selections. Fig u re 2 : Fu nc t io n keys 1 Scr oll up . P r ess to mo ve through a menu or number ser ies. 2 Esca pe. Pre ss to retur n to the pre vi ous menu or to mov e backw ards on a scr een. 3 Scr oll dow n. Pr ess to mo ve thr ough a menu or number series . 4 Enter . Press to select an option. 1 2 3 4
Ove r vi ew 17 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Stat us LEDs The status LEDs sho w autoloader and driv e status i nformation. The left, green LED sho ws ready status information, and th e right, amber LED sho ws fault status information. On/ Off Butt on The On/Of f button is a soft ke y , which means that if the autoloader is moving an y cartridges when you press t he On/Off b utton, it f inishes moving them before po wering off. Ho we ver , any other functions, such as writing to a tape or performing a diagnostic test are interrupt ed and terminated when you press the On/Of f button. Mag az ines The magazines contain part of the robotic s that mo ve the cartridges inside the autoloader . The autoloader is equipped with two cartridge magazines. The magazines are remov able, and each magazine accommodates up to eight cartridges. The magazines store your data tape cartridges and can also store your cleaning cartridge. Fi gure 3: M agazine
Ove r vi ew 18 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Rea r Vi ew The fans and connection ports are visi ble on the back of the autoloader . Fig ure 4 : Auto lo ad er re ar view Cooling F ans The autoloader has a system cooling fan, plus a se cond fa n to cool the power supply . These fans maintain the acceptabl e temperature range for the tape dri ve path and all internal electronics. See Appendix C, âSpecif ications, â for details about required specif ications. AC P owe r Pl u g The autoloader requires a 110/ 220 v olts A C po wer connection. 1 AC p o we r p l u g 5 Swi t ch e s ( fa c t or y us e o n ly ) 2 Fa n 6 S CSI connector s 3 Man ual ma ga zine e jec t slo t 7 Man ual ma ga zine e jec t slo t 4 Ether net connect or 2 2 1 4 5 3 6 7
Ove r vi ew 19 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Ethernet Connection The ethernet connection lets you connect the autoloader to a network, enabling remote administration. V ia the network, the autoloader can access an SNMP server and a Simple Network T ime Protoc ol (SNTP) time serv er . The ethernet connection supports File T ransfer Protocol (ftp) and Hyper T ext T ransf er Protocol (http). Y ou can do wnload firmw are update s using ftp and perform administrati ve tasks, including diagnostics, using http. SCS I C on ne c ti o n The autoloader supports both lo w-voltage dif ferential (L VD) and single ended (SE) connections, ho wev er , data transfer rates and SCSI cable lengths will be reduced if an SE connection is used on an SSL1016 with an SDL T 320 dri ve. An L VD connection is recommended for the SSL1016 with an SDL T 320 dri ve. For best performance, an L VD c onnection using an Ultra3 adapter is recommended for the Ultrium 460 dri ve. A 68-pin VHDCI connector links the autoloader to the e xternal host server . A second VHDCI port is used for terminatio n or to connect another SCSI de vice. If other SCSI de vices will be sharing the bus, mak e sure that SCSI cable length limits are not exceeded and that the other devices will not impact the performance of the tape dri ve b y utilizing too much of the bandwidth. Note: Adding a SE dev ice to an L VD bus caus es the entire bus to op er ate at SE speeds and with SE cable length requir em ents. DCA S witc hes The switches on the back of the dri ve carrier assembly (DCA) hav e no user function at this time.
Ove r vi ew 20 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Internal Vie w Figure 5 sho ws the internal compon ents of the autoloader . The pick er sits behind the front panel and mailslot, and can accep t and eject cartridges from the mailslot, magazines, and tape driv e. The dri ve carrier assembly (DCA) contains the tape dri ve, internal po wer supply , controller boar d, and cooling fan; it can be removed and replaced as a single component. Figur e 5: Autoload er internal vie w 1 Pi c ke r 2 D rive ca rrier a ss em bly Pi c ke r The picker mo ves the cartridges from one location to another . One motor rotates the picker platform to position t he picker arm in front of the dri ve, mailslot, or desired magazine. Another motor positions the picker arm to retrie v e or replace the cartridge. The rotation motor en gages the arm on a notch of the cartridge, and the translation motor mov es the cartri dge from the picker to the dri ve (or magazine or mailslot) or from the dri ve (o r magazine or mailslot) to the picker . 2 1
Ove r vi ew 21 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide DCA The dri ve carrier assembly (DCA) is conf igured with one DL T1, SDL T 320, or Ultrium 460 tape dri ve, depending on the model. The DCA facilitates the easy remov al of the dri ve. T o change tape driv es, you can replace the DCA without havi ng to remove the top cov e r of the autoloader . Bar code Reader The barcode reader pro vides in ventory feed back to the host application and/or LCD panel by reading the cartridge barc ode labels. The autoloader stores the customized in ventory data in its non-volatile memory . For best performance, HP recommends usin g only HP barcode labels: â Part number C9240-67903 for DL T or SDL T cartridges â Part number C7970B for Ultrium data cartridges Supported Sof t w are The autoloader supports mo st major operatin g syste ms and is also compatible with most popular backup software applications. Note: Infor mation on specif ic su pp orted oper ating sy stems and back up appli cations can be f ound at ht tp: //w w w .hp.com and at vendor websit es.
Ove r vi ew 2 2 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide
23 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 2 Installation and Configur ation Pr eparation Make sure that the w ork area is free from conditions that could cause electrostatic dischar ge (ESD). See Appendix B, âEle ctrostatic Discharge, â for additional information. Y ou will need a #2 Phillips screwdri ver for rackmount installations. SCSI Bus R equirements The autoloader contains a SCSI interface that supports both Single Ended (SE) and Lo w V oltage Dif ferential (L VD) communi cation, ho wev er , data transfer rates and SCSI cable lengths will be reduce d if an SE connection is used. The autoloader is not compatible with a Hi gh V oltage Dif ferential (HVD) SCSI bus. The follo wing SCSI hos t adapter cards ar e currently supported on the autoloader: Note: F or best perf ormance , an L VD connection is r ecommended. T able 2: Suppor ted Adapters Adapter DL T1 SDL T 3 20 Ultrium 46 0 64-bit/66 MHz Du al Channel W ide Ultr a3 S CSI adapte r (L VD) yes ye s yes 64-bit/66 MHz Si ngle Chann el Wi de Ultr a3 S CSI adapte r (L VD) yes ye s yes 64 -b it Dual Channel W ide Ultr a2 S CSI adapte r (SE a nd L VD) yes ye s no
Installati on and Conf igur ation 2 4 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide The follo wing cables are ship ped with your autoloader: â 68-pin VHDCI connector to 68-pin VH DCI connector 3 foot (.092 meter) cable â 68-pin VHDCI connector to 68-pin VH DCI connector 6 foot (1.83 meter) cable â 68-pin VHDCI connector to 68-pin HD connector 6 foot (1.83 meter) cable SCSI Cable and T er minator Requirements If the autoloader is the last de vice on the SCSI b us you mu st attach a terminator to the SCSI connector on the back panel of the autoloader . There must be a terminator on each end of the SCSI b u s. T ypically , the host adapter provides the front-end termination. SCS I C ab l e Le ng t h L V D SCSI conf igurations ha ve a maximu m allow able bus length of 39.4 feet (12 meters). T o determine the cable length of the bus, measure the lengths of the SCSI cables connecting each device to that b us and add those lengths together for the total length. T o that total length, ad d 16 inches (40. 64 cm) for the internal SCSI cable length used in the autoloader . Accessories The follo wing accessories are sh ipped with each autoloader: â Installation poster â SCSI cable(s) â RJ-45 Ethernet cable, 10 foot (3.048 meter) â SCSI terminator â Hardware brackets and handle s to rackmount the autoloader â Standalone conf iguration hardware â Tw o m a g a z i n e s â 1 data cartridge â Po wer cord â Rackmount template
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 25 S SL1 016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide â Documentation CD (documents in PDF fo rmat) Installation Location Caution: T o pr ev ent damage to the tapes and the tape dr iv es, position the autolo ade r so that no c oo ling vents are lo cate d d irect ly in front of the un it; this helps minimi ze the amount of f or eign debr is enter ing the tape path. Choose a location that m eets the follo wing criteria: â Room temperature: 10 ºC to 35ºC (50ºF to 95ºF) â Po wer source: â A C po we r v oltage: 100 V to 1 27 V or 200 V to 240 V â Line frequency: 50 Hz to 60 Hz â Air quality: Minimal sources of particul ate contamination. A void areas near frequently used door s and walkwa ys, stack s of supplies that collect dust, and smoke f illed rooms. A void placing the au toloader near printing machi nes as airborne ink contaminates tape dri ves. Note: Ex c essi ve dust and debr is ca n damage tapes and tape dr iv es. â Humidity: 20% to 80% relati v e humidity (non-condensing) â Front Clearance: about 2 inches (about 5 cm) from rack door; about 6 inches (about 15 cm) from w all or solid object; about 12 in ches (a bout 30 cm) to insert a cartridge in the mailslot, and ab out 28 inches (about 71 cm) to insert or remov e a magaz ine.
Installati on and Conf igur ation 2 6 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Requir ed T ools and Hard war e f or Rackmount Installation Y ou need a Phillips scre wdri ver to in stall your autoloader into a rack. Make sure you have all the necessary part s you need before you beg in installation. Y ou need the follo wing parts: â 8 clip nuts, plus four additional clip nuts (included with your rack) if using the optional installation rails â 2 U-channel brackets with spring clips â 2 rear support brack ets â 8 rear support brack et screws â 8 mounting scre ws (plus fo ur additional mounting scre ws if using the optional installation rails) â Rack template Rac k mo u nt ing WA R N I N G : It takes t wo p eop le to safely rackm ount your auto load er . WA R N I N G : Bef ore y ou begin, mak e sur e that th e rac k is suffic ien tly stabl e. If pr ovi ded, low er the rack le veler f e et and make sure an y requir e d stabili z ers are installed . If pro v ided, e xtend the r ack an ti-tip dev ice . F a ilur e to e x tend t he anti-tip dev ice could r esult in per sonal injury or da mage to the t ape autolo ade r if the rack ti ps over . Caution: Do not remo ve the top cov er of the autoloader dur ing the installation process. Removing t he to p cover c ould result in dam age to the autolo ade r . I t also causes the a utoloader chassis t o bow and pr ev ents corr ect installati on. Caution: Make sur e that the r ack and all equipment m ounted in the r ack hav e a r eliable gr ound connecti on. V erify tha t the total c urr ent of the r ack components doe s not e xceed the c urr ent r ating o f the pow er distr ibution unit or outlet receptacles.
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 27 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide T o ra ckmount the autoloader: 1. Use the template that shipped with t h e library to mark the location of the clip nuts and mounting hardware on the mount ing rails of the rack. Figur e 6 : Me asuring w it h the rack template 2. Install two clip nuts into each front rail of the rack in the hole locations marked using the templat e. 3. Install two clip nuts into each back rail of the rack in the hole locations marked using the templat e. 4. If there are no devices installed be low the autoloader , use the optional installation rails to help support the aut o loader during installation: a. Install four clip nuts at the front of the rack, two on each rail. Install the f irst clip nuts two holes belo w the botto m autoloader clip nut. Install the second clips nuts two hol es below the f irst clip nuts. b . Insert one optional mounting rail into the rack with the support ledge fac ing in .
Installati on and Conf igur ation 2 8 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide c. Hook the curved tabs around the rear rail of the rack 1 . d. Align the rail so that the holes ar e over the pre viously installed clip nuts 2 . e. Secure with two screws 3 . f. Attach the other optional mount ing bracket using steps b through e. Figur e 7 : Installing the opti onal installation rails 1 2 3
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 29 S SL1 016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide 5. Attach the two support brackets to the rear of autoloader , tightening scre ws until snug. Caution: Be sur e the support br ac kets ar e aligned s trai ght wit h the sides of the aut oloader f or pr oper installati on into the U-c hannel br ack ets. Figur e 8: Attac hing the autoloader su pport brackets
Installati on and Conf igur ation 30 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 6. Attach the two rackmount handles 1 to the front of the autoloader , tightening the studs 2 until snug. Figur e 9: Attac hing the front rackmount ha ndles 1 1 2
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 31 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 7. Attach one U-channel brac ket to each rear rail of the rack, loosely installing the scre ws through the clip nuts. (Attach the side of the bracket with only two holes.) Do not tighten the scre ws. Figur e 10: At taching th e U-ch annel brack ets to t he rack 8. Position the autoloader in the rack so that each support bracket rests on a U-channel bracket. Each support bracket slides along the lip of the U-channel bracket. Figur e 11: P ositioning the autoloader in th e rack
Installati on and Conf igur ation 3 2 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 9. Slide the autoloader in place 1 so that: a. The mounting studs on the front e ars of the autoloader s lide into the holes between the clip nuts. b . The front ears of the autoload er align with the front clips. c. The rear support brackets engage th e locking tab on the rear U-channel brackets. Figur e 12 : Attaching th e autoloader to the front of the rack 10. Loosely install a scre w in each front clip nut to attach the ears 2 . 11. V erify that the autoloader is lev el. Adjust as needed. 12. T ighten the four scre ws that atta ch the ears to the front clip nuts. 13. T ighten the four scre ws that connect the U-channel brackets to the rear clip nuts. 14. Install and tighten the four screws th at connect the support brackets to the U-channel brackets. 1 2 2
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 33 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Figur e 13: Rear U-c hannel bracket scre ws 15. If additional products are going to be installed belo w the autoloader , remov e the optional installation brackets: a. Remove the tw o screws securing each bracket to the front of the rack. b . Pull the bracket forw ard and down, then push back to release the rear tabs. c. Remove the rail from the rack. Caution: T o av oid per sonal injury or damage to the equipment , be sure t h at the optional installation br ack ets or ot her pr ope rly inst alled r ack pr oduc ts are in place below the aut oloader at all tim es. Note: Be sure to sa ve the optional installati on brac kets in a safe place f or use if the aut oloader nee ds to be r emo ved.
Installati on and Conf igur ation 34 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide Remo ving the Autoloader F rom the Rack When remo ving the auto loader from the rack: â Always use at least two people. â Install the optional installa tion brackets if there is no device installed belo w the autoloader . â Before po wering off the auto loader , remo ve the magazines. Standalone Installation Use these instructions if you will not be installing your autoloader into a rack. Prepar ation T o prepare your autoloader for standalone installation: 1. Place one rear standalone leg into place and secure with two scre ws. Repe at for the other side. Figur e 14 : Installing the rear standalone leg
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 35 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 2. Install the front standalone bracket cov er: a. Place the cover o ver the autoloader bracket. b . Place the washers o ver the bracket holes and secure with a scre w . c. Repeat for the other side. Figur e 15: Installing t he front standalone bracket co vers Clear anc e Place the autoloader on a desk, table, or other stable, horizontal surface. Make sure the fan at the rear of the autoloader is not obstructed. Allo w about 6 inches (about 15 cm) from w all or solid object at the rear . Allo w about 12 inches (about 30 cm) to insert a cartridge in the mailslo t, and ab out 28 inches (about 71 cm) to insert or remo ve a magazine at the front.
Installati on and Conf igur ation 36 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide SCSI Connection The SCSI connection lets the host comp uter co mmunicate w ith the autoloader . Note: If yo u do not alr eady ha ve a com patible and a vaila ble S CSI HB A install ed in the host comp uter , install one befo re pr oceeding. Caution: When inst alling cables, be car eful not t o damage the SCS I pins on the connect ors. Damaged pins w ill cau se the connection t o fail. T o make the SCSI connection: 1. If the host computer i s connected to a network, check with the system administrator before turning of f power . 2. Properly po wer of f all peripheral devi ces connec ted to the host computer . 3. Po wer off the host computer . 4. Install the supplied 68-pin 6 foot (1.83 meter) SCSI cable to the double-stacked SCSI connector that is on the back of th e DCA and tighten the scre ws. Y ou can install the SC SI cable in either port. Note: Use an appr opri ate cable that matches y our host connector .
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 37 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Figur e 16 : Attaching t he cables Note: The connector on the end of the cable is offset . M ak e sur e that y ou in stall it with the corr ect orien tation so that y ou ca n fit a te r m inator o r another cable in the other port . 5. If the autoloader will be the last de vi ce on the SCSI bus, install the supplied SCSI terminator to the remaining port th at is on the DCA and then tighten the scre ws . 6. Attach the other end of the SCSI cable to the SCSI host adapter card using the appropriate cable. 7. Po wer on an y p eripheral devices you po wered off in Step 2. Note: Do not pow er on the host com puter at this time . Y ou must f irst conf igur e the autolo ad er .
Installati on and Conf igur ation 38 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide Dais y Chaining The autoloader do es not support daisy chaining with other products. Y ou can daisy chain one additional autoloader using the 68 -pin VHDCI connector to 68-pin VHDCI connector 3 foot (.092 meter) cable. Y ou must then install a terminator on the second autoloader . Ethernet Connection Attach one end of the RJ-45 cable to th e autoloader . Attach the other end to a 10/100 hub o r switch. Note: This step is not r equir ed for oper ation , but is necessar y if you w ant to use the aut oloader W eb admin istr ation f eature . Po w e r O n Carefully inspect your power cord and make sure that it is the correct one for your country or region. If the po wer cord is not correct, contact your customer service representati ve. T o connect the po wer cord: 1. Make sure that the power switch on the ba ck of the autoloader is of f (the 0 is pressed). 2. Connect the female end of the power co rd to the po wer connector on the back of the autoloader . 3. Plug the male end of the powe r cord into the po wer source.
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 39 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Figur e 17 : Connec ting the pow er cord Note: Do not pow er on the host befor e pow er i ng on the aut oloader . T o power on the autoloader: 1. Push the po wer switch that is on the back of the autoloader to the on position (the | is pressed). W ait while the autoloader performs its po wer-o n sequence. Du ring this time, the follo wing activities occur: â The cooling fans begin to operate. â The LCD illuminates and displays po wer-on messages. â The autoloader performs a po wer-on self-test (POST). â The autoloader performs a calibra tion and magazine element status. Note: Dep ending on how the autoloader w as last p o wer ed off , you ma y ne ed to pr es s the On/Of f button on the fr ont of the autoloade r .
Installati on and Conf igur ation 40 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Ve r i f i c a t i o n When you f irst po wer on the autoloader , it automatically runs a Power On Self T est (POST). During the POST , the right (amber) LED flashes rapidly . After the POST , the left (green) LED illuminates st eadily , and after approximately three minutes the LCD displays the HP logo an d dri ve type. Do one of the following: â If the autoloader po wers on successfully , continue co nfiguring the autoloader . See âConf iguration. â â If the autoloader does not po wer on successfully , mak e sure tha t: â The rear power switch is on. â The po wer cord is inserted correctly . â The SCSI bus is terminated. â The SCSI cable is connected to the autoloader and host computer . â The On/Off b utton on the front of the autoloader has been pressed. â There is not an error code disp layed on the autoloaderâ s LCD. (If an error message is displayed, see Chapter 6, âT roubleshooting. â) If you cannot resolve the problem yoursel f, contact your authorized service representati ve. Configuration T o configure your autoloader , use the Co nf igu ration submenu on the front pa nel. When you f irst po wer on the autoloader , it defaults to no password protection. After you set the security option, ho we ve r , all the conf iguration functionality is password-protected; yo u need an administrator-le vel password to conf ig ure the autoloader .
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 41 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide The Conf iguration submenu has the following options: Figur e 18: Configuration submenu Note: The a utol oader ships w ith English f ir mw are installed . T o inst all fir m war e in othe r languages, see âUpdate F irm war e â in Chapter 4. Configuration SCSI ID Etherne t Set IP Dynamic (DHCP) Static Set Subne t Mask Set Gateway Set SNM P Server Set Time Ser ver Time Set Timezone Set Date/Time Change Mode Random Sequential Seq Cycle Mode Cleaning Tape Auto Clean Tape Loc ation Compression Securi ty Security Set Password Operat or Administrato r System Update Mixed I / ES l o t
Installati on and Conf igur ation 4 2 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide T o configure the autoloader , you must set the following: â SCSI ID â Ethernet IP address (if you are no t using DHCP) â SNMP server IP address (for SNMP alerts) â T ime server IP address (or the timezo ne, date, and time, if conf iguring manually) Note: The DL T1 and SDL T aut oloaders do not ha ve a battery so if time is manually set , it i s lost and need s to b e reset when ev er the auto loader is p ow er cycled. â Control mode â Security option SCS I I D Each SCSI de vice attached to a server or workstation must ha ve a unique SCSI ID. For the DL T1 and SDL T autoloaders you need to set only one SCSI ID for the autoloader; you do not need to set up se parate SCSI IDs for the tape driv e and autoloader . Because the auto loader uses LUNs to address the dri v e and robotics, only the autoloader requires a SCSI ID. For the Ultrium 460 autoloader you must se t tw o SCSI IDs; one for the autoloader and one for the tape driv e. The default SCSI ID for the autoloader is 4. The default SCSI ID for the tape dri ve is 5. Check the IDs on all other SCSI de vices th at are on the SCSI bu s, including the SCSI host adapter , and sele ct an unused SCSI ID for the autoloader . The def ault ID for the autoloader is 5, b ut you ca n select any unused number between and including 0 and 15. If the factory de fault SCSI ID (5) is not already being used by another de vice on the SCSI b us, you do not need to change the autoloader SCSI ID from 5 if you do not want to. Note: Disr egar d the S CSI ID s wit ch on t he back of the DCA. T he aut oloade r does not use the switch to set the SCSI ID .
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 43 S SL101 6 T ape A utoloader Ref erence Gui de T o set the SCSI ID: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. Figur e 19: Main menu 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Conf iguration subm enu, scroll to SCSI ID. Figure 20: Se lect SCSI I D 4. Press Enter . 5. Scroll to the number you want to set as the autoloader SCSI ID. Figure 21: Se t SCSI ID 6. Press Enter . 7. Reboot for the ne w SCSI ID to take af fect. a. Press and hold the power b utton on the front panel until Po wer Of f appears on the LCD. b . Press the po wer button again to po wer on the autoloader . The new SCSI ID is no w in effect. Sta tus C omm ands î Configuration Diagnostics î SCSI I D Et hernet T ime Change Mod e î îî to c hange E nter to continue SC SI ID: 0 5
Installati on and Conf igur ation 44 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide Contr ol M ode Y ou can set the autoloader to either Ra ndom, Mix ed, Sequential, or Seq Cycle Mode. The defa ult control mode is Random. Note: If the I /E slot is enable d , the autoloader cannot b e used in Mix ed or Sequential Mode . The Sequential mode su pports certain bac kup applications that do not man age media. During backup, wh en one cartridge is read or writ ten to the end of the tape, the autoloader automatically returns that cartridge to its slot and loads the cartridge from the ne xt higher numbered slot to the tape dri ve to be read or written to. This continues until the backup softwa re stops accessing the driv e or until all the cartridges ha ve been sequentially accessed. In Random control mo de you can specify which ca rtridge you want to use and where you want it to go. Y ou will pr obably use this mode the most. In Mixe d mode, the autoloader supports bo th Sequential and Random mode functions. This mode can be useful in network en vironment. Note: Do not use Mi xed mode unless you ar e certain all applications support Mi xed mode oper ation. In Seq Cycle m ode, the autolo ader automatically starts o ver with magazine slot 1 when the last cartridge is used (slot 16 or highest filled slot). If this control mode is not set, the autoloader st ops when the last cartridge a vailable has been used. In Seq Cycle mode, the autoloader con tinues to c ycle until a user stops it. Caution: Seq C ycl e mode c oul d cau se data to be ov er wr itten . O nl y u se Seq Cyc l e m o d e i f yo u a re s u re t h a t t h e s ize a n d f re q u e n c y o f yo u r b a cku p s w i l l n o t pr e matu r ely ov er write your data.
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 45 S SL1 016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide T o set the control mode: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. Figur e 2 2 : Main menu 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Conf iguration submen u, scroll to Change Mode. F igure 2 3: Select Change Mode 4. Press Enter . The mode options appear . A checkmar k appears after the enabled m ode. F igure 2 4: M ode Opti ons 5. Do one of the following: â T o change the control mode, scro ll to the desired mode and press Enter . A checkmark appears. Press Enter again. â T o lea ve the control mo de unchanged, pre ss Escape . 6. Reboot for the new mode to tak e affect. a. Press and hold the power b utton on the front panel until Po wer Of f appears on the LCD. b . Press the po wer button again to po wer on the autoloader . The ne w control mode is no w in ef fect. St atus C omman ds î Configuration Diagnostics SC SI ID Et hernet T ime î Change Mo de Cleanin g Ta p e î î 3 Random Mixed Seque ntial Seq Cycle Mod e
Installati on and Conf igur ation 46 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide Note: When you enable the Sequential mode , L UN 1 no longer appears on th e SCS I bu s. Sequential Mode Operation If you enable the Sequential control mo de you must use the Sequen tial Ops submenu und er the Commands menu to o p erate the autoloader after it has been rebooted. â Start allo ws you to load the first cartridge. â Resume allo ws you to continue if the cycle w as stopped. â Stop stops the cycle. T o start Sequen tial Mode o peration: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Commands. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Commands submenu, scroll to Sequential Ops. 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Sequential Ops submenu, scroll to Start. 6. Press Enter . Moving first tape to drive is displayed. T o stop Sequen tial Mode operation : 1. On the main menu, scroll to Commands. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Commands submenu, scroll to Sequential Ops. 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Sequential Ops subm enu, scroll to Stop Cart. 6. Press Enter . Ejecting tape from drive is displayed. T o resume Sequential Mode operation: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Commands. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Commands submenu, scroll to Sequential Ops. 4. Press Enter .
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 47 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide 5. On the Sequential Ops su bmenu, scroll to Resume. 6. Press Enter . Ethernet Ethernet is the method the autoloader uses to access a network. W ith an Ethernet connection, you can remotely access the auto loader over the network to which it is connected. T o use the Ethernet connec tion, you must define th e following: â A dynamic or static IP address for the autoloader â A subnet mask â An IP gatew ay If you want SNMP alerts or a link to a tim e server you must def ine the follo wing: â A Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) serv er (for SNMP alerts) â A Simple Network T ime Protocol (SNTP) time serv er , or set the time and timezone manually Note: The DL T1 and SDL T aut oloaders do not ha ve a battery so if time is ma nuall y set , it i s lost and need s to b e reset when ev er the auto loader is p ow er cycled. Autoloader IP Addres s An Internet Protocol (IP) address is the addr ess of any de vice that is attached to a network. Each de vice must hav e a unique IP address. IP addresses are writte n as four sets of numbers separated b y periods ranging from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.2 55.255. IP addresses are either permanent or dy namically assigned. A permanent address remains the same each time the de vice c onnects to a network. A dynamic address changes each time the device connects to the netw ork, and is assigned by the network serv er using a class of software called Dynamic Host Conf iguration Protocol (DHCP). When you f irst po wer on the autoloader , the default method for setting the IP address is the dynamic method (DHCP). If yo u want to use DHCP you can sk ip this step. T o determine the IP address wh en using DHCP , view the Ethernet status information (see âV iew Ethernet Informationâ).
Installati on and Conf igur ation 48 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide T o set a dynamic IP address: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. Figur e 25: Main m enu 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Conf iguration subm enu, scroll to Ethernet. F igure 2 6: Select Ethernet 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Ethernet submenu, scro ll to Set IP . Figur e 2 7 : Set IP 6. Press Enter . 7. Scroll to Dynamic (DHCP). Figur e 28: Set Dynamic IP 8. Press Enter . St atus C omman ds î Configuration Diagnostics SC SI ID î Ether net T ime C hang e Mod e î î Set IP Set Subnet Mask S et G ate way Se t SNMP Server î Dy namic 3 Stati c IP 016.117.0 76.045
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 49 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide 9. Reboot to change the IP address. a. Press and hold the power b utton on the front panel until Po wer Of f appears on the LCD. b . Press the po wer button again to po wer on the autoloader . The IP address is changed. T o set a permanent IP address: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. (See Figure 25 .) 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Conf iguration submen u, scroll to Ethernet. (See Figure 26 .) 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Ethernet submenu, scro ll to Set IP . (See Figure 27 .) 6. Press Enter . 7. Scroll to Static IP . (See Figure 28 .) 8. Press Enter . 9. At each position of the IP address, scro ll to the correct numb er and press Enter to adv ance your cursor . Note: Use the Escape k ey to backspace t o a pr ev ious te xt box , if necessar y . When you ha ve set the IP address, th e autoloader displays Enter to sa ve. 10. Press Enter . The Conf iguration submenu reappears an d the permanent IP is no w in effect. Y ou do not need to reboot the autoloader . 11. Press Escape or Enter to return to th e Ethernet submenu. Subnet M ask Creating a subnet mask is a method to split IP networks into a series of subgroups, or subnets, to improve pe rformance and security . T o set a subnet mask: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. (See Figure 25 .) 2. Press Enter .
Installati on and Conf igur ation 50 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide 3. On the Conf iguration submen u, scroll to Ethernet. (See Figure 26 .) 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Ethernet submenu, scro ll to Set Subnet Mask. (See Figure 27 .) 6. Press Enter . 7. At each position of the mask address, scroll to the correct number and press Enter to adv ance your cursor . Figur e 29 : Set ting the Subnet Mask Note: Use the Escape k ey to backspace t o a pr ev ious te xt box , if necessar y . When you ha ve set the mask, the au toloader displays Enter to sa ve. 8. Press Enter . SUB addr changed to appears on the LC D. Y ou do not need to rebo ot the autoloader . 9. Press Escape or Enter to return to th e Ethernet submenu. IP Gate wa y An IP gate way is a de vice that con verts data into the IP protocol. T o set an IP gate way: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. (See Figure 25 .) 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Conf iguration submen u, scroll to Ethernet. (See Figure 26 .) 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Ethernet submenu, scroll to Set Gate way . (See Figure 27 .) 6. Press Enter . Subnet Mask: 255.255.195.000
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 51 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 7. At each position of the gate way address, scroll to the correct number and press Enter to adv ance your cursor . Figur e 30: Setting t he gatewa y address Note: Use Escape to backspace t o a pr ev iou s te xt box , if nec essary . When you hav e set the gate way address, the autoloader displays Enter to sav e. 8. Press Enter . GW changed appears on the d isplay . Y ou do not need to reboot the autoloader . 9. Press Escape or Enter to return to the menu. SNMP Ser ver An SNMP server mo nitors a network by processing reporting acti vity in each network de v ice (hub, router , bridge, an d so on). The server uses this information to def ine what is obtainable from each de vice and what can be control led (turned of f, on, and so on). T o set an SNMP server: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. (See Figure 25 .) 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Conf iguration submen u, scroll to Ethernet. (See Figure 26 .) 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Ethernet submenu, sc roll to Set SNMP Serv er . (See Figure 27 .) 6. Press Enter . Default Gatewa y : 016.117.065.001
Installati on and Conf igur ation 5 2 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 7. At each position of the server address, scroll to the correct number and press Enter to adv ance your cursor . Figur e 31: Setting t he SNMP ser ver address Note: Use the Escape k ey to backspace t o a pr ev ious te xt box , if necessar y . When you ha ve set the server address, the autoloader displays Enter to sa ve. 8. Press Enter . SNMP Server changed to appears on the LCD. Y ou do not need to rebo ot the autoloader . 9. Press Escape or Enter to return to th e Ethernet submenu. Tim e S er ver Y ou can connect the autoloader to a server that will supply the correct date and time using Simple Netw ork T ime Protocol (SNTP). The autoloader uses this information to time stamp information in its memory . T o set a time server: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. (See Figure 25 .) 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Conf iguration submen u, scroll to Ethernet. (See Figure 26 .) 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Ethernet submenu, scro ll to Set T ime Server . (See Figure 27 .) 6. Press Enter . SN MP Serve r: 255.255.255.255
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 53 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide 7. At each position of the server address, scroll to the correct number and press Enter to adv ance your cursor . Figur e 32: Setting the time server address Note: Use the Escape k ey to backspace t o a pr ev ious te xt box , if necessar y . When you ha ve set the server address, the autoloader displays Enter to sa ve. 8. Press Enter . T ime Server changed to appears on the panel display . Y ou do not need t o reboot the autoloader . 9. Press Escape or Enter to return to th e Ethernet submenu. Tim e If you cannot access a time server because your server does not support SNTP or for security reasons, you can set the tim e manually . If you want to include time changes such as dayl ight savings ti me, yo u must make those changes manually as well. Note: The DL T1 and SDL T aut oloaders do not ha ve a battery so if time is ma nuall y set , it i s lost and need s to b e reset when ev er the auto loader is p ow er cycled. T o set the timezone: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. Figur e 33: Main menu T ime Server : 192.005.044.041 St atus C omma nds î Configuration Diagnostics
Installati on and Conf igur ation 54 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Configur ation su bmenu, scroll to Time. Figur e 34: Selec t Time 4. Press Enter . 5. On the T ime subm enu, scroll to Set T imezone. Figur e 35: Select Set Timezone 6. Press Enter . The timezone screen appears. Figu re 36 : Ti me zon e sc re en 7. Scroll to set the number of hours dif ference between your local time and Greenwich Mean T ime (GMT). 8. Press Enter . SC SI ID Et hernet î Ti me C hange Mode î î Set T imezone Se t Dat e/Time Timez one: s et hr s G M T 0 :00
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 55 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide A ne w time zone screen appears. Figur e 3 7 : New timezone screen 9. Scroll to set the number of minutesâ dif ference between your local time and Greenwich Mean T ime (GMT). 10. Press Enter . The ne w timezone is set. T o set the date and time: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. (See Figure 33 .) 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Conf iguration subm enu, scroll to T ime. (See Figure 34 .) 4. Press Enter . 5. On the T ime subm enu, scroll to Set Date/T ime. Fi gure 38: Selecting Se t Date/Time 6. Press Enter . The Date/T ime screen appears, with th e cursor under the f irst digit in the second ro w . Figur e 3 9: Date/Time screen Timez one: s et mi ns G M T 0 :00 Se t Time zone î Set Da te/Time YYYY.MM.D D.HH.MM 2001.01.01.12.00 Us e 24 hour format, Time zo ne GM T 0:0 0
Installati on and Conf igur ation 56 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide 7. The first four digits represent the curre nt year . F or each digit, scroll to the correct number and press Enter to advance your cursor . Note: Use the Escape k ey to backspace t o a pr ev ious te xt box , if necessar y . 8. The ne xt two digits represent the cu rrent month. For each digit, scroll to the correct number and press Enter to advance your cursor . 9. The ne xt two digits represent the cu rre nt day . For each digit , scroll to the correct number and press Enter to advance your cursor . 10. The ne xt two digits represent the curre nt hour . For each digit, scroll to the correct number and press Enter to advance your cursor . 11. The last two digits represent the curre nt minute. F or each digit, scroll to the correct number and press Enter to advance your cursor . Enter to save appears on the LCD. 12. Press Enter . Security Y our autoloader includes a security optio n to password-protect the autoloaderâ s functionality . The default security setting is Off, meaning that no password is required. Ho wev er , you can enable the secu rity option so that users must enter a password to access functiona lity . Set Security When you f irst po wer on the autoloader , the security optio n is set to Off. Use the follo wing procedure to enable the security option. If the passwords are already set you must ha v e an administrator -le vel passw ord to set passwords. T o set the security option: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. Figur e 40: Main me nu St atus C omma nds î Configurat ion Diagnostics
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 57 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Conf iguration subm enu, scroll to Security . Figure 41: Se lect Se curity 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Security su bmenu, scroll to Security . If a check mark appears after th e word, the security option is on. If no ch eckmark appears, the security option is of f. Figur e 42: Security options 6. T o change th e setting, press Enter . This toggles the security option. For e xam ple, if the security opti on was set to On, it is no w set to Off, and no checkmark appears. Set P a ss words Many operations on the autoloader ar e pa ssword-protected to ensure data integrity . Y ou can set passwords at the ad ministrator le vel and at the operator le vel. Operator-le vel users ha ve acce ss to the Commands and Status menus. Administrator -lev el users hav e access to all functionality . Passw ords must be exactly six nu mbers long. The default pa ssword is 000000. T o set a password: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. (See Figure 40 .) 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Conf iguration submen u, scroll to Security . (See Figure 41 .) 4. Press Enter . Clea nin g Tape Co m pressio n î I/E Slot î Secur ity î î 3 Secu rit y Set Password
Installati on and Conf igur ation 58 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide 5. On the Security submen u, scroll to Set Passw ord. Figur e 43: Selec t Set P ass word 6. Press Enter . 7. T o set a password at the operator le vel, scroll to Operator . T o set a password at the administrator le vel, scroll to Administrator . Figur e 44 : Select pass word le vel 8. Press Enter . The Set Passw ord sc reen appears. Figur e 45: Set P asswor d sc re en 9. Press Enter again. A text box appears abo ve the f irs t asterisk. 10. In the text box, scroll to the first number of the passw ord. 11. Press Enter . The te xt box abov e the asterisk disappea rs and another text box appe ars abov e the next asterisk. 12. Repeat steps 10 and 11 to enter th e remaining numbers of the passw ord. 3 Sec urit y î Se t Password î O perator A dm inistra tor Lo gin as OP E nt er N e w Pas swo rd â â â â â â
Inst allation an d Conf igur atio n 59 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Note: Use the Escape k ey to backspace t o a pr ev ious te xt box , if necessar y . When you ha ve entered six numbers, the autoloader di splays Submit Password belo w the asterisks. 13. Press Enter to submit th e password. Password Successfully Changed appears on the LCD. 14. Press Enter . The Operator and Administrator optio ns reappear . Y ou can either enter another password, or press Escape or Enter to return to the main menu. Lost P asswords If you for get the administrator-le vel pass w ord, you cannot enter a ne w password . Y ou must call your customer service representati ve.
Installati on and Conf igur ation 60 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide
61 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 3 T ape Car tridge Usage This chapter describes the magnetic ta pes and ho w to handle them properly . T ape Car tridges Def in ed The follo wing tables list the types of me dia supported in each tape autoloader . T able 3: DL T1 Supported M edia Med ia Pa r t Number Form at Supported Operation SDL T I C7 980A An y Not supported DL T IV C5141F DL T4000 R e ad Onl y* DL T IV C5141F DL T7 000 Not sup ported* DL T IV C5141F DL T8000 Not sup ported* DL T IV C5141F DL T1/ V alueSt orage for mat R e ad and W rite DL T I cleaning tape C7 99 8A n/a Cleaning DL T clea ning tape C514 2F n/a Not sup ported SDL T 1 cleaning ta pe C7 9 82A n/a N ot su pported *Note: DL T IV media, w hich has a f ormat othe r than DL T 1, must be bulk er ased to allo w a DL T 1 dr ive to perf orm wr ites to the media . Erasing the data cartr idge in its ori ginal driv e is not adequa te b ecau se the ex isting, incom patible for mat remains on the tape cartr idge . The degauss ing equ ipment used to bu lk erase pre viously formatted media must have an O ersted r ati ng at least equal to, and pr efer ably two or three times greater than , the rating for the media bein g era sed. F or e xample , DL T T ype IV medi a is r ated at 1850 Oer steds. Specif ic pr oced ur es for degaussing y our med ia should be included with y our degaussing equipment . CA UTION: All prev iously recorded data is r emoved if you bulk er as e a tape ca rtridge . Note: Ultrium cartr idges ar e not compatible with DL T dri ves. Ultr ium cart r idges ar e not compa tible with t he SSL1016 DL T magazines .
T ape Cartr idge Usage 6 2 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide . . â DL Ttape IV data cartridges provide a storage capacity of up to 40 GB (nati ve)/80 GB (compressed) per cartrid ge. The tape cartridge shell is dark bro w n and has no pattern. â SDL T data cartridges a re green and hav e a storag e capacity of up to 160 GB (nati ve)/320 GB (compressed). â 400 GB (Ultrium 2) data cartridges are dark red and pro vide a storage capacity of up to 20 0 GB (nativ e)/400 GB (compressed). The 4 00 GB (Ultrium 2) data cartridges prov ide the highest capacities. T able 4 : SDL T 320 Supported M edia Med ia Pa r t Number Form at Supported Operation SDL T I C7 980A SD L T 220 R e ad and W rite SDL T I C7 980A SD L T 3 20 R e ad and W rite DL T IV C5141F DL T4000 R e ad Onl y DL T IV C5141F DL T7 000 Read Onl y DL T IV C5141F DL T8000 R e ad Onl y DL T IV C5141F DL T1/V alueSt orage f orma t Read Only DL T I cleaning tape C7 99 8A n/a Not support ed DL T clea ning tape C514 2F n/a Not sup ported SDL T 1 cleaning ta pe C7 9 82A n/a Cleaning Note: Ultr ium cartri dges ar e no t compatibl e w ith SDL T dri ve s. Ultr ium cartri dges ar e not compatib le with the S SL1016 SDL T maga zines. T able 5: Ultrium 46 0 Supported M edia Med ia Pa r t Number For ma t Supported Operation Ultr ium- 2 C7 9 7 2A Ultr ium- 2 R ead and W r ite (Ultr ium- 2 f ormat) Ultr ium-1 C7 9 71A Ultr ium-1 R ead and W r ite (Ultr ium-1 for mat) Ultr ium Univ ersal Clea nin g Car tridge C 7978 A n / a C l e a n i n g Note: DL T1 and SDL T cartridges ar e not compatible with the Ultrium dr ive . DL T1 and SDL T cartr idges ar e not compatible with the S S L1016 Ultr ium 460 maga zi nes.
T ape C a rtr idge Usa ge 63 S SL1 016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide â 200 GB (Ultrium 1) data cartridges are blue and pro vide storage capacity of up to 100 GB (nati v e)/200 GB (compressed). T ape Car tri dge M aintenance T o greatly reduce the chance of problems w ith your tape cartrid ges or damage to your tape dri ve, us e the followi ng guidelines. Inspec ting T ape Car tridges Inspect your tapes to identify an y poten tial tape cartridge problems and prev ent accidental loss of data or damage to your cartridges. In spect your tapes: â When you change or load a ne w tap e cartridge â If a tape cartridge is dropped or subjected to physical shoc k â If the tape driv e becomes inoperable after loading a tape cartridge â If you recei ve a shipment of tape cartridge s that shows an y sign of shipping damage T o inspect a tape: 1. Remov e the tape cartridge from its protecti ve plastic case. 2. Check the tape cartridge for obvious cracks o r other physical damage. Look for broken or missing parts. 3. Gently shake the tape cartridge. Li st en for any rattling or sounds of loose pieces inside the cartridge.
T ape Cartr idge Usage 64 S SL1016 T ape Au toloade r Ref er ence Guide 4. If you hear anything on DL T or SDL T cartrid ges, do not use the cartridge. a. If it doesn't rattle, check the tape leader inside the cartridge. T o do this, open the door on the rear of the ca rtridge by releasing the door lock. Fi gure 46: Opening the cartridge door
T ape C a rtr idge Usa ge 65 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide b . For SDL T cartridges: The loop should stick up about an eighth of an inch when viewed from the edge; the loop mu st be a closed loop. If the loop is torn, bent, pulled in, or not sticking up about an eigh th of an inch, do not use the tape cartridge. Figur e 4 7 : Checking t he SDL T tape leader 1 Good 2 Wo r n ( d o n o t u s e )
T ape Cartr idge Usage 66 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide c. For DL Ttapes: hold the tape cartridge so that the end that is inserted into the tape dri ve is facing you. On the left side of the tape cartridge you should see a small plastic tab . This is the left reel lock and can break if the cartridge is dropped. If you ca nnot see the tab, do not use the cartrid ge. d. For DL Tta pes: Do not use the cartri dge if you see an y of the follo wing conditions: Figur e 48: DL Ttape fault y leader situations 1 Sw allow ed leader - leader is completel y wound ar ound into the cartr idge , leaving no l oop for the buckl ing lin k to c atch. 2 T orn leade r loop - if the loop ge ts r ipped to cr eate an opening, the buc kli ng link will f ail to grab the loop and thus not tr ansport the tape into the dr ive . 3 Crea sed leade r loop - the loop is stuck and the cartr idge leader cannot un wind int o the dr ive . As the dr iv e leaderâs b uckling link engages t he cartrid ge leader loop , it can detac h the loop and dr ag it into the dri ve cau sing damage. e. For DL Ttapes: look at the bottom of the tape cartridge. The bottom reel lock is located in the lo wer right corner and can break if the cartridge is dropped. If you cannot see the tab, do not use the cartridge. Note: On the DL Ttape cartr idge , the r eel lock is w hite and eas y to see. 5. Check for proper operation of th e tape cartridge write-protect switch. 1 2 3
T ape C a rtr idge Usa ge 67 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Prot ec ting T ape Cartridges T o extend the life of your tape cartridges: â Remov e dust on the outside of tape cartridges with a damp cloth. â Do not use adhesi ve labels or P O ST -IT notes on the top, side, or bo ttom of your tape cartridge. Use only the label provided with each cartridge and slide it in the label slot on the cartridge. â Do not use graphite p e ncils, water-soluble felt p e ns, or oth er debris-producing writing instruments on labels. â Replace â ne ver erase â a labe l. â Put unused cartridge labels in a separate location. A static electricity charge on a cartridge may cause a label to cling to the cartridge. If you accidentally insert a label into the dri ve along w ith a cartridge, the label may cause problems with or damage to the tape dri ve. â Do not touch or allo w direct contact with tape or tape leader . Dust or natural skin oils may contaminate the ta pe and impact tape performance. â Do not e xpose the tape cartridge to moisture or direct sunlight. â Do not e xpose cartridges to extreme temperatures or humidity . Refer to the documentation that co mes with your tape med ia for appropriate operating and storage temperatures. â Do not e xpose tape cartrid ges to magnetic f ields. â A void unnecessary opening of the cartridg e door; this can e xpose the tape to contamination or phys ical damage. â Do not drop the tape cart ridges or su bject the cartridges to physical shock. â Do not insert an y cartridge that has been dropped into a tape driv e without carefully inspecting for dam age. A dropped cartridge can ha ve dislodged, loosened, or damaged internal componen ts which can also damage the tape driv e. â Do not take tape cartridges apart. â Do not lea ve cartridges in the tape dr i ve when the autoloader po wer is of f.
T ape Cartr idge Usage 68 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide T r anspor ting T ape Car tridges T o safely transport tape cartridges: â Always keep each tape cartridge in its protecti ve plastic case when it is not in the tape dri ve. â When carrying tape cartridges in their ca ses, al ways orient the ca ses so that the groov es in the cases interlock. This prev ents the cases from slip ping apart and falling. â Do not carry cartri dges loosely in a box or in any other container . Allo wing cartridges to hit together exposes them to unnecessary physical shock. Storin g T ape Ca r tridg es T o store tape cartridges properly: â Ne ver stack more than fi v e tape cartridges. â When placing tape cartridges in archi val storage, mak e sure you stand each tape cartridge vertically . â Store tape cartridges in their plastic containers and in the en vironmental conditions recommended in your tape media documentation. â If storage and/or transportation of a tape cartridge has exposed it to conditions outside the recommended en vironment, âcond itionâ the tape cartridge to its operating en vironment for a 24-hour period. â Do not place cartridges on or near devices that may produce magnetic fields such as computer monitors, motors, or video equipment. Such exposure can alter or erase data on the tape.
T ape C a rtr idge Usa ge 69 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Using th e W r ite -Protect Sw itc h All tape cartridges hav e a write-protect switch to prev ent accidental erasure of data. When you enable write-protection, e xisting data on the tape cannot be ov erwritten, nor can additional data be ap pended to the tape . When you disable write-protection, existing data on the tape can be overwr itten, and addit ional data can be appended . Note: Befo re loading a car tr idge into y our autoloader , make sur e that you set the wr ite-pr otect sw itch to the desir ed position . DL T IV Car tridges Fi gure 4 9: W rite-pr otect swit c h, DL T IV 1 W r ite-pro tected ( An or ange indicato r appears a b o ve the s witc h) 2 W rite-en abled 1 2
T ape Cartr idge Usage 7 0 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide T able 6 : W rite -Protect Sw itc h P ositions W rite-Protect S witch Po s i t i o n Orange Indicator Resul t W rite-Pro tected (with the h ub f acing d own an d the write -p r o tec t switc h facin g you as sh o wn in Fi g u re 49 , sli de the swit ch to the left . ) Vis i bl e â Data ca nnot be written to the tape. â Existing data on the tape cannot be ov er wr itten. â Additional data cannot be appended to the media. W rite-Enabled ( with t he hub f acing d own an d the write -p r o tec t switc h facin g you as sh o wn in Fi g u re 49 , sli de the swit ch to the r ight.) Not v isible Unless t he cartri dge is wr ite- pr otected v ia softwar e: â Data can be wr it ten to the tape. â Existing data on the tape can be o verwr itten . â Additional data on the tape can be ov er wr itten.
T ape C a rtr idge Usa ge 71 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide SDL T 3 20 Cart ridge Figure 50 illustrates using the write-protect switch. By mo ving the switch to the left 1 , the cartridge is write-protected, a nd b y moving the switch t o the right 2 , the cartridge is write-enabled. Figur e 50: W rite-protec t s witch, SDL T 3 20 2 1
T ape Cartr idge Usage 7 2 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Ultrium Data Cartridge 1 sho ws the location of the right protec t switch. By mo ving the switch on the bottom of the cartridge to the right, the cartridge is write-prot e cted, and b y moving the switch to the left, the cartridge is write-enabled. Figur e 51: W rite-protect switch, Ultrium 1
73 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 4 Autoloader O peration Y ou can operate the autoloader by an y of the follo w ing methods: â Autoloader front panel â Operate manua lly to insert and eject tapes and to unload magazines. â Ethernet W eb Administration â The Ethernet connection lets you perform administrati ve functions remotely us ing W eb Administration. Y ou can also mov e tapes within the autoloader through the Ethernet co nnection. â Host backup software â The SCSI bu s connects the autoloader to the host server and the backup software. Y ou can perform any fu nctions contained in the backup softw are. Fr ont P anel Components The front panel includes a blue backlit liq uid crystal display (LCD), four function ke ys ( [scroll up], [scroll do wn], Enter , and Escape ), and two LEDs. Fun c t io n Key s Use the function ke ys to na vi gate through the menu and select options. Use the up and do wn scroll buttons to position the cursor ne xt to the item you want. Once the cursor is in place, press Enter to select the item. T o return to a previous menu without making a selection, press Escape . The Escape button can also function as a backspace key .
Aut oloader Operati on 7 4 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide LEDs The LEDs display autoloader and driv e stat us information. When th e autoloader is po wered on, the left, green LED gi ves ready status information, and the right, amber LED gi ves fault status information. LC D The LCD displays a scrolling menu that lets you to access information and e xecute comm ands. Note: When the autoloader is idle for mor e than 60 sec onds, the logo screen appears on the L CD , si milar to the scr eensav er function on y our PC. Pr ess any functi on ke y to displa y th e top-le vel me nu . The four menus displayed on the LCD are circular menus; you can scroll th rough the options using either the up or do wn scroll buttons. The f irst menu you access on the front panel contains the top-le vel menu items. Each item in turn contains submenus. T able 7 : Indicator Ac tiv it y Indicator State Operating Condition Left (green ) On Slow F lash Fas t Fl a s h Aut oloader and tape dri ve ar e idle. T ape dr iv e on l y is activ e. Aut oloader only is acti ve or aut oloader and ta pe dri ve a re acti v e. Rig h t ( a m b e r) O f f On Conti nuous flash Br ief f lash No err ors or pr oblems detected. T ape dr iv e or autoloader err or is detected . Non-har dw a r e er ro r is detected (f or ex ample , cleaning is r equir ed. POST i n pro gres s
Aut oloader Operation 75 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide Figur e 5 2: Menu T ree Structure Note: F or SSL1016 Ultr ium 460 tape au toloader s, dr iv e logs and dri v e read/w rite t ests mu st b e accessed using L ibrary & T ape T ools. L& T T is available at: ht tp: //w ww .hp .com/su ppor t/tap etool s . All the functionality accessed from the sc rolling menu is passw ord-protected. T wo le vels of security are b uilt into the menu. The lower -le vel security is the operator le vel and the higher -le vel security is the administrator le vel. There is one password for each lev el. Status Configuration Diagnostic Te sts Error Logs Halt Test Self Test Health Chec k Picker Test Magazine Test Inventory Test Drive Read SCSI ID Autoload er Ethernet Set IP Dynamic (DHCP) Stat ic IP Set Subnet Mas k Set Gateway Set SNMP Se rver Set Ti me Server Time Set Date/Ti me Set Time Zon e Cha nge Mo de Stat us Random Sequenti al Seq Cycle Mode Cleaning Tape Auto C l e an Tape Lo cation Compressi on Security Security Set Password System Up date V ersion Element Stat us Drive Stat us V ersion Ethernet I/E Slot Commands Eject Tape to Mail Slot By Barcod e By Location From Dr ive Right Mag azine Left Magaz ine Enter (Mai l Slot) To Drive To Locati on Move Inventory Enter Pass word Log Out Cleaning T ape Load to D rive Unload F rom Drive Enter Cl eaning Tape Eject Clean ing Tape Sequenti al Ops Start Resume Stop Home Drive Writ e Drive Read /Write Mixed
Aut oloader Operati on 7 6 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide The administrator password accesses all the a v ailable functionality . The operator password accesses all the functionality in the Commands and Status submenus. Fron t P a n e l Fu n c t io n al i t y For mo st functions, you can use either the front p anel or the W eb Administration tool through the Ethernet connection. Setting P ass wor ds Many functions on the autoloader may be password-protected to ensure data integrity . T o access the menu items necessa ry to ex ecute these functions, you must f irst enter your password. All passwords are six numeric digits. T o set a password, see the section âSet P ass w o rdsâ in Chapter 2. When a passwor d has been entered, all passw ord-protected functionality is a vailable until the user logs out. If you d o not use the front panel for a period of time, the logo reappears on the LCD. When the logo rea ppears, the autoloader has automatically logged you out. Y ou will ha ve to re-enter your password to access the menu functionality . Default F ront P anel P ass wor d The def a ult passwo rd for the front panel is 000000. Logou t T o logout: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Commands. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Commands subm enu, scroll to Log Out. 4. Press Enter . Session Complete appears on the LCD.
Aut oloader Operation 77 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Using Data Cartridges T ypically , when you f irst inst all your autoloader , you inse rt your cartridges int o the magazines and then insert the magazi nes into the autoloader . Ho wev er , you can insert and eject cartridges indi vidually using the mailslot, or you can eject a magazine, manually insert and remov e cartr idges, then insert the magazine back into the autoloader . The au toloader automatically detects the presence of a cartridge in the mailslot and in a magazine slot. Note: On th e fr ont panel m enu , Enter or Eject means the tape enters and leaves the aut oloader thr ough the mailslot. Whene ver y ou see Load or Unload, it means the tape is loaded into or unloaded fr om the tape dri ve. If you try to perform an ille gal operation, the autoloader refuses to perform the operation. F o r e xample, if you try to inse rt a cartridge through the mailslot to the dri ve but the dri ve already contains a car tridge, the mailsl ot does not unlock. If you try to unlo ad a cartridge from the dri v e while the autoloader is writing to the tape, your command is igno red. In sert in g a S ing le C artr id ge Use the mailslot to insert a single cartri dge into the autoloader . Y ou must enter a v alid password to unl ock th e mailslot before you can insert a cartridge. When you insert a cartridge through the mailslot, you ca n load it into the tape dri ve or store i t in a magazine. Note: Be sure y ou are u sing a c artr idge that is compatible with y our tape dri ve . See Chapter 3 , âT ape Cart r idg e Usage, â for c ompati bilit y tables. T o insert a cartridge into the tape driv e: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Commands. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Commands subm enu, scroll to Enter . 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Enter submenu, scroll to T o Driv e. 6. Press Enter .
Aut oloader Operati on 7 8 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide After Load cartridge appears on the LC D, a countdo wn ap pears. Y ou have 20 seconds to load a cartridge through the mailslot before it relocks. The autoloader automatically loads the cartridge into the tape dri ve. Note: Only insert the cartr idg e until y ou meet r esistance . Figur e 53: Inserting a car tridge into th e mailslot T o insert a cartridge to a magazine slot: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Commands. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Commands subm enu, scroll to Enter . 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Enter submenu, scroll to T o Location. 6. Press Enter . A map of all the magazine slo ts appears. Occupied slots are indicated by an asterisk. 7. Scroll to the slot where you w ant to store the cartridge. 8. Press Enter .
Aut oloader Operation 79 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide After Load cartridge appears on the LC D, a countdo wn ap pears. Y ou have 20 seconds to load a cartridge through the mailslot before it relocks. The autoloader automatically loads the cartri dge into the selected slot. Mov ing a Single Car tridge T o move a single cartridge from one loca tion to another insi de the autoloader: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Commands. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Commands subm enu, scroll to Mov e. 4. Press Enter . The Mov e screen appears. 5. Under From:, scroll to the current loca tion of th e cartridge you want to mov e. Occupied slots are indica ted by an asterisk. Note: If you sele ct an empt y lo cation No Source El ement appe ars on the LCD . Ch oose a differ ent location . 6. Press Enter . 7. Under T o:, scroll to the location to which you want to mov e the cartridge. Occupied slots are indica ted by an asterisk. Note: If you select a lo cation that is alread y occ up ied Destination F ull ap p ear s on the L CD . Choo se a differ en t location . 8. Press Enter . The LCD displays Ent or Esc? below your selections. 9. Press Enter . An hour glass appears on the LCD as the autoloader mov es the cartridge to its ne w location.
Aut oloader Operati on 80 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Ejecting a Singl e Cartridge Y ou can remov e a single cartridge from the autoloader by spec ifying the desired cartridge by barcode or location, or b y ch oosing the cartridge currently in the tape driv e. T o eject a cartridge by barcode: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Commands. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Commands subm enu, scroll to Eject. 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Eject submenu, scroll to Cartridge. 6. Press Enter . 7. Scroll to By Barcode. A barcode label appears. 8. Scroll to the label that corresponds to the cartridge you want to unload. 9. Press Enter . An hour glas s appears on the LCD as the cartridge yo u want is ejected from the mailslot.W ait until the hourglass disappea rs from the LCD before pulling out the cartridge. T o eject a cartridge by location: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Commands. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Commands subm enu, scroll to Eject. 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Eject submenu, scroll to Cartridge. 6. Press Enter . 7. Scroll to By Location. A map of all the magazine slo ts appears. Occupied slots are indicated by an asterisk. 8. Scroll to the slot containing the cartridge you w ant to eject. 9. Press Enter .
Aut oloader Operation 81 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide An hour glas s appears on the LCD as the cartridge yo u want is ejected from the mailslot.W ait until the hourglass disappea rs from the LCD before pulling out the cartridge. T o eject a cartridge from the tape dri ve: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Commands. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Commands subm enu, scroll to Eject. 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Eject submenu, scroll to Cartridge. 6. Press Enter . 7. Scroll to From Dri ve. 8. Press Enter . An hour glas s appears on the LCD as the cartridge yo u want is ejected from the mailslot. W ait until the hourglass disapp ears from the LCD before pulling out the cartridge. Note: After e jecting a single cartr idge , immediat ely r emo ve it f rom t he mail slot when pr ompte d. Rem oving a M a gaz in e When you want to remove se veral cart ri dge s at once, remo ve the magazine(s) fi rs t . T o remov e a magazine: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Commands. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Commands subm enu, scroll to Eject. 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Eject submenu, scroll to Right Ma gazine or Left Magazine. 6. Press Enter .
Aut oloader Operati on 8 2 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Y ou will hear a distinctiv e popping sound as the appropriate maga zine is ejected from the autoloader . Left magazine has be en ejected or Right mag azine has been ejected appears on the LCD. Caution: T o pr ev ent damage to the autoloader or the maga zine, u se both hands when r emo ving the maga zine fr om the aut oloader , supporting th e entire length of the magazine . 7. Grasp the magazine by the handle with one hand and slide it out, suppo rting it underneath with the othe r hand. Note: Once yo u eject a maga zine , you m ust full y r emov e it or fully r e-install it bef or e pow er ing off the autoloader . Fig ure 54 : Rem oving a m ag azi ne
Aut oloader Operation 83 S SL1 016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide Installing a Magazine T o install a magazine: Note: Be sure y ou ar e using the pr oper maga zine for y our aut oloader . DL T/SDL T maga zines are no t compatible w ith the SSL1016 Ultr ium 460 Au toloader . Ultr ium maga zines are no t compatible wit h the SSL1016 DL T1 Auto loader or the SSL10106 SDL T 3 20 Autoloader . 1. Grasp the mag azine by the handle with one hand and support it underneath with the other hand. 2. Slide the magazine into the magazine bay . Make sure you positio n the magazine correctly; it sh ould slide smoothly . Caution: Be sure that yo u install only a left-or iented magazine in the left bay and a ri ght-ori ented maga z ine in the r ight bay . Fi gure 5 5: Installing a maga zine 3. The magazine is correctly installed wh en you feel it click into place and the front is flush with the front panel. Left Mag Inserted or Right Mag Inserted appears on the LCD.
Aut oloader Operati on 84 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Inserting and Remov ing Cart ridges The magazine must be fully remo ve d to insert and remo ve cartridges. There are two ge ars located on both ends of the magazine. Mo ve the slots within the magazine b y using these two gear s. Use the two openin gs along the top of the magazine and t he four openings along the bottom of the mag azine to insert and remov e cartridg es from the eight slots within each ma gazine. T o insert a cartridge into the magazine: 1. Center a slot within one of t h e six openings on the side of the magazine. 2. Properly orient the cartridge. Note: Ther e is a k ey ing featur e in each slot t hat only lets y ou full y insert the cartr idge one wa y . 3. Fully insert the cartridge into the slot. When pushing the cartridge into the slot you will feel slight resistance until the ca rtridge is properly seated into the slot. Figur e 56: Inserting a cartridge T o remove a cartridge, use the handles to ce nter the desired slot in the op enings on the side of the magazine. Use yo ur thumb and index fi n ger to pull out the cartridge. Y ou will feel slight resist ance when removing the cartridge. 1 2
Aut oloader Operation 85 S SL1 016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide Manually Remo ving a Magazine T o remo ve a magazine manually: 1. Po wer off the autoloader . 2. Place the autoloader on a flat, stable surface. 3. Locate the small rectan gular opening on the back of the autoloader behind the magazine that you want to remo ve. Figu re 57 : Ma nu ally removi ng a mag azi ne 2 1
Aut oloader Operati on 86 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide 4. Carefully insert the end of a small, sturdy tool, such as a jewelerâ s scre wdriv er , about one inch into the op ening. On a right magazine, keep the tool as far to the left as you can. On a left magazine, keep the tool as far to the right as you can. 5. On a right magazine, slide the tool to the right. On a left magazine, slide the tool to the left. Y ou will feel resistance as the tool presses against the latch. Press hard enough to release the latch. Fig ure 58 : In si de rel ea se l at c h When you release the latch, the mag azine pops forward so that the front of the magazine is no longer fl ush with the front panel. 6. W ith one hand, g rasp the magazine by the handle and s lide it forward to remo ve. Place your other hand under the mag azine to support it and pre vent it from falling.
Aut oloader Operation 87 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Changing the Orientation Any magazine can be conf igured to f it in the ri ght or left magazine bay . T o change the orientation of a mag azine: 1. Remov e the two scre ws that attach th e handle to the front of the magazine. Figur e 5 9: Removing the screw s 2. Unsnap the hand le carefully , ensuring you do no t break the hinge. 3. Rotate the handle 180 d egrees so that what wa s the top of the handle is no w the bottom. 4. Rotate the magazine 18 0 degrees so that what was the front of the magazine is no w the rear .
Aut oloader Operati on 88 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide Figur e 60: Remo ving the handl e 5. Snap the ha ndle back on the end of the magazi ne. 6. Install the two scre ws to attach the handle securely to the magazine. Vie wing S tatus Information From the scrolling menu, you can vie w the follo wing information: â Autoloader status â Firmware v ersion â Element status â T ape driv e status â T ape driv e version â Ethernet information â System performance 1 2
Aut oloader Operation 89 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Autoloader Status The autoloader status pr o vides information about: â Whether a magazine is instal led or not â SCSI connection acti v ity â Ethernet connection acti vity T o view the autoloader status: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Status. Figur e 61: Main me nu 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Status submenu, scroll to autoloader Info. F igure 6 2: Select Au toloader Inf o 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Autoloader Info submenu, scroll to Status. F igure 6 3: Select S tatus 6. Press Enter . î Status C omma nds Conf iguration Diagnostics î A utoloader Info D rive Inf o Et hernet I nfo î Status Ve rsion Element Status
Aut oloader Operati on 90 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide A list of messages similar to the follo wing screen appears. Figur e 64 : Autoloader status m essage T able 8: Autoload er Status Messag es Magazine L= â The left m agazine is pres ent. R= â The right ma gazine is present. L= (no â ) The left magaz ine is not present. R= (no â ) The right magazine is not pr esent. Loader ONLINE The au toloader SCSI connection is act ive . OFFLINE The autoload er SCSI connection is not active . Drive ONLINE The driv e SCSI connection is active . OFFLINE The drive SCSI connect ion is not active . Mode Random Def a ult. The autoloader is operating in Random mode. Mix ed The autoloader is oper ating in Mix ed mode. Sequential The autoloader is oper ating in Sequential mode . Seq Cycle Mode The autoloader is operatin g in Seq Cycle Mode. NO TE: ISVs suppor t diff erent modes o f operation. Be sure your autoloader is set to the correct mode of operation. The autoloader defaults to Random mode. See âControl Modeâ in Chapter 2 fo r addi tional information. Bar code Reader â A barcode reader is present. No â A barcod e reader is no t present. M agaz i nes : L â R â Loa der: ONLINE D rive : ONLIN E Mode: Mixed Barcode Reader: â
Aut oloader Operation 91 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide View Fir mware V e r si on T o view the f irmware v ersion: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Status. (See Figure 6 1 .) 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Status submenu, scro ll to Autoloader Info. (See Figure 62 .) 4. Press Enter . 5. On the autoloader Info subm enu, scroll to V ersion. (See Figure 63 .) 6. Press Enter . A list of messages similar to the follo wing screen appears. Figur e 65: Autoloader version messages T able 9: Autoloader V ersion M essages Firmware The number indic ates the fir mware v ersion . EDC The number indicates the Error Detection Co de that was gener ated when the firmware was installe d. The autoloa der uses this num ber to verify that the fir mware and the memory holding the firmware are go od. HW Rev T he number indicates the ha rdware v ersion. ME Rev The number indicat es the mechanical version. F i rmwa re : V 7.0 E D C: 575A 49B 8 H W ME R e v : 1 1
Aut oloader Operati on 92 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide Vie w Element Status The element status reports the status of the magazine slots. The status indicates whether a slot contains a cartridge, and wh ich slot is allocated as the cleaning cartridgeâ s slot. T o view an elementâ s status: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Status. (See Figure 6 1 .) 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Status submenu, scro ll to Autoloader Info. (See Figure 62 .) 4. Press Enter . 5. On the autoloader Info submenu, scroll to Element Status. (See Figure 63 .) Figur e 66: E lement status Press Enter to vie w ma gazines. A map of all the magazine slots appears. An asterisk (*) indicates a slot occupied by a data cartridg e, a (@) indicates a slot occupied by a cleaning cartridg e, and an (!) indicates an empty slot designated as cleaning slot. Figur e 6 7 : Mag azine map Note: If the I/E slo t is ena bled, I/E Sl ot re places eithe r Slot 1 or Slot 16 . 6. Scroll to the slot containing the cartridge for which you want to see the status. 7. Press Enter . â Drive: A D I285 M ail slot: Picker: Enter to Vi ew M agaz ines Sl ot 1 Sl ot 2 * Sl ot 3 * Sl ot 4 * Sl ot 5 Sl ot 9 Sl ot 1 3 * Sl ot 6 S l ot 1 0 * Sl ot 1 4 * Sl ot 7 * S l ot 11* S l ot 1 5 * S l ot 8 * Sl ot 1 2 * S l ot 1 6 *
Aut oloader Operation 93 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide The Element Status screen appears, di splaying the barcode label for that cartridge (if an in v entory has pre viously been run). A mov e command also appears on the screen. Fig ure 68: El em ent sta tu s sc re en a. If you want to mov e the cartridge scroll until the location you want to mov e to appears under TO :, then press Enter . b . If you do not want to mo ve the cartridge, press Escape . Vie w T ape Dri ve Status T o view the tape dri ve status: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Status. (See Figure 6 1 .) 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Status submenu, scroll to Driv e Info. (See Figure 62 .) 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Dri ve Info submen u, scroll to Status. (See Figure 63 .) 6. Press Enter . A list of messages similar to the follo wing screen appears. Figur e 6 9: Drive status screen Label: DRC101 M ove Slot 2 To: Slot 9 Es c to Exit SC SI ID 5 Loa der LUN 1 Compressio n Enable d D rive Ca rt Present
Aut oloader Operati on 9 4 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Vie w T ape Dri ve V ersion T o view the tape dr ive v ersion: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Status. (See Figure 6 1 .) 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Status submenu, scroll to Driv e Info. (See Figure 62 .) 4. Press Enter . 5. On the Dri ve Info submenu, scroll to V ersion. (See Figure 63 .) 6. Press Enter . A list of messages similar to the follo wing screen appears. Figur e 7 0: T ape driv e version sc re en T able 10: T ape Dri ve Status Messag es SCSI ID The number indicates th e autoloader SCSI ID numb er . Loader LUN The number indicat es the Logical Unit Number of the autoloader . Compression Indicate s whether the tape d r iv e compression is enab led or disab led. Drive Cart Indicat es whether a car tr idge is pres ent in the drive. T able 11: T ape Dri ve V ersion Messages Pr oduct T ype The number indicates the type of product installed (DL T1). P olicy V ersion The numb er indicates the v ersion of the policy processor for the tape driv e, typically the tape driv e fir mware v ersion. Servo V ersion The numb er indicates the servo pr ocessor fir mware v ersion. Pr oduct Ty pe: DLT 1 Policy Versio n: 35.52 Se rvo Ver sion: 65.6
Aut oloader Operation 95 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide View Eth ernet Informati on T o view Ethernet information: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Status. (See Figure 6 1 .) 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Status submenu, sc roll to Ethernet Info. (See Figure 62 .) 4. Press Enter . A list of messages similar to the follo wing screen appears. Figur e 71: Vie w Et hernet information Run In ventor y The autoloader provides a method to keep track of the cartridges currently loaded in the magazines. If your autoloader is eq uipped with a barco de reader , it can scan the cartridge barcode labels and store the data i n its non-v olatile memory . The autoloader automatically runs an in v entory whene ver you po wer it on or insert a maga zine. T o tak e in v e ntory: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Commands. 2. Press Enter . T able 12 : Ethernet Information M essages Mac Addres s Indicates the serial num ber of your Ethe r net card. IP Address The number indicat es the static IP address or the currently assigne d dynamic IP address. Network Indicates whether or not t he autoloader is conn ected to the netw or k. M A C address: 00-e0-9e-03-0e-39 I P A ddress 16.116.76.46 Ne twork: Disconnected
Aut oloader Operati on 9 6 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 3. On the Commands submen u, scroll to In vent ory . 4. Press Enter . The autoloader scans the barcodes on all the cartridges present. Note: If no bar code label is pr esent t he autoloade r checks f or the pr esence or a bsence of cartr idges in all l ocations. Set Data Compression Y ou can set the autoloader to write data to the tape in its nati v e (uncompressed) format or to compress it. Compressing the data means that the autoloader can typically write twice as much data to the same amount of tape. Actual compression may v ary , depending on the type of data being b a cked up. Compression also increases the performance of the data transfers from or to the SCSI bus. T ypically you will want to leav e this option enabled unless you are backing up data that is already compressed. Attempting to compress compressed data can reduce pe rformance and increas e data size. T o set compression option: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. Figur e 7 2: M ain menu 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Conf iguration subm enu, scroll to Compression. Figur e 7 3: Set Compression St atus C omma nds î Configurati on Diagnostics T ime C han ge M ode î Clea nin g Tap e î Co mpres sion î
Aut oloader Operation 97 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 4. Press Enter . If a check appears next to Compression, the compression option is enabled. If no checkmark appears, the co mpression option is disabled. a. T o leav e the compression o ption unchanged, press Escape . b . T o change the compress ion option, press Enter . Update F irmw are Autoloader f irmware can be updated b y using Library & T ape T ools (L&TT). Additional details can be obtained at: http://w ww .hp .com/support/tapetools Configur ation T o change an y Ethernet conf igurations, see âEth ernetâ in Chapter 2. Import/Expor t Slot Note: An y chan ge req uir es a po wer c ycl e of the a uto loader and r econf i gurati on of t he IS V soft war e. T o change the config uration of the Import/Export slot : 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. Figur e 7 4 : Main menu 2. Press Enter . St atus C omma nds î Configurati on Diagnostics
Aut oloader Operati on 9 8 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 3. On the Conf iguration subm enu, scroll to I/E Slot. Figur e 7 5: Configur e Import /Export Slot 4. Press Enter . If a check appears next to Import/Export Slot, the I/E slot is enabled. If no checkmark appears, the I/E slot is disabled. a. T o leav e the I/E slot unchanged, press Escape . b . T o change the I/E s lot, press Enter . Any change requires a po wer cycle of th e autoloader and reco nf iguration of the ISV software. If the autoloader is not po wer cycled: â The changes will not occur . â The front panel red LED flashes and displays a â Please power cycle â message. When the I/E slot is enabled, Slot 16 is designated as the I/E slot, when two magazines are present. Clea nin g Tape Co m pressio n î î I/ E Slo t Se curity î
Aut oloader Operation 99 S SL101 6 T ape A utoloader Ref erence Gui de We b A d m i n i s t r a t i o n Many of the same operations performed from the front panel can also be performed remotely using W eb Administration. The follo wing browsers are recommen ded for use with W eb Administration: â Wi n d o w s ® â Internet Explorer 5 .0, 5.5, and 6.x â Netscape 4.x and 6.x â Linux, Unix ® , and Sun Solaris⢠8 â Netscape 4.x and 6.x After establishing a connection to the autoloader , open the HTML bro w ser and enter the IP address of the autoloader . (See â Autoloader IP Addressâ or contact your web administrator .) Be sure that proxy server settings in your browser are disabled. Fi gure 7 6: W eb Administr ation Home P age
Aut oloader Operati on 100 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Default P asswor d The default user ID is guest. The def ault password is guest. See âSet Secu rity Optionâ in this chapter fo r information o n changing the user ID and password. Status information appea rs on the right side of the home page an d e very page of W eb Administration. The menu heading s also appear at the top of e very page. T o access the functionality under the menu he ading, click the menu heading. W eb Administration prom pts you for your username and ID, then display s the opening page for that menu. The Conf iguration page includes a submen u on the left side of the page. When W eb Administration displays the f irst Configuration page, it is open to the Systems Operations submenu. Y o u can click Networking to access Ethernet settings options, and Security to access security settings options. Figur e 77 : Configuration P age Usually , after you hav e set the options, you click a Submit button to implement the ne w settings. Next to all Submit b uttons is a Reset button. The Reset b utton does not reset the autoloader to its def a u lt settings, it just clears the settings in the option so that you ca n change them.
Aut oloader Operation 101 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide View S ta tu s In for ma ti o n T o view status information from W eb Administrati on, you only ha ve to open it. Y ou do not need to ex ecute any command to see it because the status information appears on the right s ide of e very page. This information is updated automatically e very 10 second s, so the status you see is real-time information. Mov e T apes To m o v e a t a p e : 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Commands . 2. From the drop-do wn menu under Mo ve tape from:, select the current location of the tape you want to mov e . Note: Y ou c an also clic k the slot on the graphic to select it. 3. From the drop-down menu un der T o:, se lect the location to which you want to move the ta pe . 4. Click submit.
Aut oloader Operati on 102 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Fi gure 7 8: Mo ving tapes using W eb Admi nistration
Aut oloader Operation 103 S SL1016 T ape A utoloader Ref erence Gui de Run In ventor y The autoloader automatically runs an in ventory when you po w er it back on or insert a magazine. If you need to run an in ventory in addition to this, you can us e W eb Administration to do it remotely . T o run an in ve n tory: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Commands . 2. On the Commands p age, click In ventory . Set to Home If the autoloader is not able to suc cessfully ex ecute a move or in v entory command, try ex ecuting a HOM E command and then retry the mov e or in ventory command again. The HOME co mmand resets the au toloader as a means to help the autoloader recov er from an unknown internal condition. Y ou should very rarely need t o use this command. T o set to Home: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Commands . 2. On the Commands p age, click Home .
Aut oloader Operati on 104 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Run Diagnostic T e sts If the status information indicate s an error , view the e vent log. T o v i ew th e eve n t l o g : 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Diagnostics . Figur e 7 9: Diagnostic page 2. Click Vi e w L o g . Note: See Chapter 6, âT r oubleshooting, â for a list of err or messages. When an error message ap pears in the status information, you may need to run a diagnostic test. T o run a diagnostic test: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Diagnostics . 2. From the T est drop-down menu, select the diagnostic test that yo u want to run. 3. Click submit.
Aut oloader Operation 105 S SL1 016 T ape Au toloader Refe rence Guide 4. While the test is running, you can view the status of the test by clicking Vi e w Status . T o refresh the status information, click the Back button on yo ur bro wser, and then click the V iew Status b utton again. 5. T o sav e the report, click File , Sa ve As , then navigate to the directory where you want it sav ed. Set the S y stem Ti me If your autoloader is not connected to a time server , you can set the time manually with W e b Administration. Note: The DL T1 and SDL T aut oloaders do not ha ve a battery so if time is ma nuall y set , it i s lost and need s to b e reset when ev er the auto loader is p ow er cycled. Enter the time zone f irst, then the date and time. If you want to include time changes, such as da ylight sa vin gs time, you must set those manually wh en the y occur . T o set the time zone: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Conf igurations . 2. From the f irst drop-down list ne xt to Ti me Zo ne, select the number of hoursâ dif ference betwee n your local time and Greenwich Mean T ime (GMT). 3. From the second drop-down list next to T ime Zone, select the numbe r of minutesâ difference between your local time and Greenwich Mean T ime (GMT). 4. Click submit.
Aut oloader Operati on 106 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Figure 80: Set ting s ystem tim e T o set the date and time: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Conf igurations . 2. From the month d rop-down list, select the current month. 3. From the day drop-down list, select the current day . 4. From the year drop-down list, select the current ye ar . 5. In the hour text box, type the current hour , in 24-hour format. 6. In the minute text box, type the current minut e. 7. Click submit.
Aut oloader Operation 10 7 S SL1 016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide Cha nge the S CSI ID If you need to change the autoloaderâ s SCSI ID, you can do so from the W eb Administration tool . T o change the SCSI ID: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Conf igurations . 2. From the drop-do wn list under SCSI ID, click the number to which you w ant to set the ID. Figure 81: Setting th e SCSI ID 3. Click submit. Y ou must reboot the autoloader befo re the new SCSI ID takes ef fect. Note: F or the Ultr i um 460 aut oloader you m ust set t wo S CSI IDs; one f or the aut oloader and one f or the tape dr iv e . The def ault SCS I ID for t he autoloade r is 4. The def ault S CSI ID for t he tape dr i ve is 5 .
Aut oloader Operati on 108 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Set the Contr ol Mode T o set the control mode: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Conf igurations . Under Mode, the current mo de is selected. Figur e 82: Setting th e Contr ol M ode 2. T o change the mode, click a dif ferent op tion. 3. Click submit. Y ou must reboot the autoloader be fore the new mode t akes effect.
Aut oloader Operation 109 S SL1 016 T ape Au toloader Refe rence Guide Set the Compression Note: T ypi cally yo u will wan t to leav e this option enabl e d unless y ou ar e backing up data that is already compr essed . Attempting t o compr ess compr essed data can r educe perfo rmance and increa se data siz e . T o set the compression: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Conf igurations . 2. If a checkmark appears in the box ne xt to Compression, compression is enabled. T o disable compression, c lick the box to remov e the checkmark. 3. If no checkmark app ears in the box next to Compression, com pression is disabled. T o enable compress ion, click the box to enter a checkmark. 4. Click submit. Fi gure 83: Setting the compr ession
Aut oloader Operati on 110 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Set the Cleaning M ode T o enable the Auto Clean function, you must ha ve a slot desi gnated for the cleaning tape cartridge. If you or another user hav e already designated a slot, that slotâ s number appears nex t to Cleaning Cartridge Location. If a slot has not been designated, the box is empty . Note: Aut o Clean is not support e d on W i ndo ws 2000 r emov able st orag e. T o set the cleaning tape slot: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Conf igurations . 2. From the drop-down list next to Cl eaning Cartridge Location, select the number of the slot in which you wa nt to s tore the cleaning cartridge. 3. Click submit. Figur e 84 : Cleaning T ape If you want to set the Auto Clean option, use the following proc edure. T o clean the tape dri ve manuall y , use the Move fu nction to load and unload the cleaning tape from the tape dri ve.
Aut oloader Operation 111 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide T o set Auto Clean: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Conf igurations . 2. If a checkmark appears in the box next to Enable Auto Clean, the option is enabled. T o disable Auto Clean, click the box to remo ve th e checkmark. If no checkmark appears in the box next to Enable Auto Clean, the option is disabled. T o enable Auto Clean, click the box to enter a checkmark. 3. Click submit. Note: A cleaning ta pe should be pr esent in t he cleaning tape slo t to confi gure A uto Clean . When Au to Clean is turned o ff , the cleaning tape is e jected to the mailsl ot.
Aut oloader Operati on 112 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Set the Import/Expor t Slot T o set the I/E slot: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Conf igurations . 2. If a checkmark appears in the box next to I/E Slot, the I/E slot is enabled. 3. If no checkmark appea rs in the box next to I/E Slot, the I/E slot is disabled. 4. Click submit. Figur e 85: Import/Expor t Slot Any change requires a po wer cycle of th e autoloader and reco nf iguration of the ISV software. If the autoloader is not po wer cycled: â The changes will not occur â The front panel red LED flashes and displays a âPlease power c ycleâ mes sage When the I/E slot is enabled, Slot 16 is designated as the I/E slot.
Aut oloader Operation 113 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Set Ethernet Configurations When you originally insta lled the autoloader , you set the Ethernet connections through the front panel. Ho we ver , you can chan ge them through the W eb Administration tool . T o change the Ethernet conf igurations: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Conf igurations . 2. On the secondary m enu, click Networking . The current settings a ppear on the screen. Figur e 86: N etworking options 3. If a checkmark appears in the box ne xt to DHCP , the dynamic IP address option is enabled. T o se t a permanent IP address: a. Click the box to remov e the checkmark. b . In the IP address f ields, type in the ne w address, using your T ab ke y to mov e from bo x to box. 4. If no checkmark app ears in the box next to DHCP , the perm anent IP address option is enabled. T o change a permanent IP address, in the IP address f ields, type in the ne w address, using your T ab key to move fro m box to box.
Aut oloader Operati on 114 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e 5. T o set the IP address from a permanent address to a dynamic address , click the box ne xt to DHCP , and delete the IP add ress from the IP address fields. 6. T o change the IP address of the su bne t mask, gatew ay , SNMP serv er , or the time server: a. Click the box to left of the addr ess you wa nt to change to enter a checkmark. b . T ype in the ne w address, using your T ab ke y to mov e from box to box. 7. Click submit. Note: If the pr eceding ste ps change the IP addr ess, the ne w addr ess must be en ter ed into the br o wser to contin ue using the W eb Administr ation fea tu r e.
Aut oloader Operation 115 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Set Security O ption When you enable the secur ity option, users must enter a passw o rd to access the autoloaderâ s functionality . A password allo ws either administrator-le vel access or operator -lev el access. (For more informatio n on le vels of pass word-protection, see âSecurity . â) T o set the security option: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Conf igurations . 2. On the secondary m enu, click Security . Figur e 87 : Security option 3. If a checkmark appears in the box next to Securi ty , the security option is enabled. T o disable the security op tion, click the box to remo ve the checkmark. If no checkmark appears in the box next to Security , the security option is disabled. T o enable the secu rity option, click the box to enter a checkmark. 4. Click submit.
Aut oloader Operati on 116 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Set P assw ords When you en ter your password on th e autoloader front panel, there is no associated username. Ho we ver , when you click any menu heading on the W eb Administrationâ s home page, W eb Administration prompts you for a username and password. In W eb Administration, you can set up to four usernames and IDs, which can include both alpha and numer ic characters. User names and IDs must be b etween four and sev en chara cters long. T o set a password: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Conf igurations . 2. On the secondary m enu, click Security . 3. From the drop-down list next to User T ype, select Adm inistrator or Operator . 4. In the Username f ield, enter a username. 5. In the Passw ord field, enter the passw ord. 6. In the V erify Password f i eld, re-enter the password. 7. Click submit. Y ou can reset the operator password for the front panel from W eb Administration. Ho wev er , you cannot reset the front panel administrator passwo rd this way . T o reset the front panel operator passw ord: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Conf igurations . 2. On the secondary m enu, click Security . 3. Click the box ne xt to Reset Front P anel Password. A checkmark appears. 4. Click submit.
Aut oloader Operation 117 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Update the Firm war e T o update the f irmware: 1. On an y W eb Administratio n page, click Updates . Figur e 88: G et s ystem updates 2. Click Br owse . 3. Navigate to the location of the f irmware update. 4. Click Submit. The autoloader automatical ly uploads the new code and updates the firmware. Note: A mes sage displays on the L CD to i ndicate that the update is complete . D o not pow er cycle the autoloader until this message display s.
Aut oloader Operati on 118 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e
119 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 5 T ape Dri v e Cl eaning Y our tape dri ve read/write head should be cleaned periodically . When cleaning is needed, the dri ve automatic ally requests the backup software to perform a cleaning operation. Ho we ver , you can also initiate cleaning fro m the front pa nel as needed. Use a cleaning tape to clean your tape dri ve. â The DL T1 tape cleaning tape looks just lik e a DL Ttape IV cartridge, e xcept that its shell is beige and has a stop ne xt to the door hinge to prev ent insertion in a non-compatible dri ve. â The SDL T cleaning tape is gray . â The Ultrium cleaning tape is orange. Note: See Chapte r 3, âT ape Cartr idge Usage , â fo r a list of compatible cleaning cartr id ges and part n umbers . Configuring the Cl eaning T ape Location Before inserting the cleaning tape yo u mu st configure the cleaning tape location. 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. 2. Press Enter . 3. Scroll to Cleaning T ape. 4. Press Enter . 5. Log in as Administrator . 6. Scroll to Cleaning T ape Location. 7. Press Enter . 8. Select an a vailable slot (no * next to the slot number).
T ape Dr iv e Cleaning 120 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e 9. Press Enter . The selected slot has a ! ne xt to the slot number . 10. T o deconfig ure the slot, press Enter again. The selected slot no longer has a ! next to the slot number . Inser ting the Cl eaning T ape There are two methods for inserting the cleaning tape: â Load the cle aning tape dire ctly into an ejected magazine and then reload the magazine. â Insert the cleaning tape through t he mailslot. T o insert the cleaning tape through the mailslot: 1. On the main menu , scroll to Command. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Command submenu, scrol l to Cleaning T ape. 4. Press Enter . 5. Log in as Operator . 6. On the Cleaning T ape submenu, scro ll to Enter Cleaning T a pe. 7. Press Enter . A countdo wn appears on the LCD. Y ou ha ve 20 seconds to insert the cleaning tape through the mailslot before it re locks. Push the car tridge in. When prompted, press Enter . The system accepts the tape. If you try to load a cleaning tape through the mail slot without ha ving config ured a cleaning slot, the autoloader rejects the tape. 8. Once you insert the cleaning tape th rough the mailslot, do one of the follo wing: â Proceed directly to manual cleaning. â Store the cleaning tape in a magazine slot to be used later . Storing the Cl eaning T ape When you st ore the cleaning tape, you can use it in the follo wing ways: â Use it for manual cleaning.
T ape Dr iv e Cleaning 121 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide â If the Auto Clean function is enabled, the autoloader can move the cleaning tape from the magazine slot to the tape dri ve and, after the cleaning cycle, return it to its slot. â If backup software cleaning function is enabled, the software can mo ve the cleaning tape from the magazine slot to the tape d riv e and, after the cleaning cycle, return it to its slot (for more information, see your backup softwareâ s documentation). T o store the cleaning tape: 1. After you ha ve inser ted the tape th rough the mailslot into the dri ve for cleaning, on the main menu , scroll to Conf iguration. 2. Press Enter . The Configuration submenu appe ars. 3. On the submenu, scroll to Cleaning T ape Location. 4. Press Enter . 5. Log in as Administrator . A map of all the magazine slo ts appears. Note: When a map o f the magazine slots a ppears on the displ ay , an aster isk (*) indi cates a slo t occu pied b y a dat a cartri dge , a (@) indi cates a slo t occu pied b y a cleaning cartri dge, and an (!) indicates an empty slot designated as cleaning slot . Figur e 89 : Magazine slot map 6. Scroll to the slot where you w ant to store the cleaning tape. Note: If yo u stor e the c leaning tape , you m ust spec ify in w hich slot the t ape is to be stor ed. Slot 1 Slot 2 * Slot 3 * Slot 4 * Slot 5 Slot 9 Slot 13 * Slot 6 S l ot 1 0 * Slot 14 * Slot 7 * S l ot 11* S l ot 1 5 * S l ot 8 * Slot 12 * S l ot 1 6 !
T ape Dr iv e Cleaning 12 2 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e 7. Press Enter to unload the cleaning tape from the dri ve. The autoloader mov es the tape to its new location. Ejec ting the C leaning T ape Y ou need to eject the cleaning tape fro m the autoloader under the follo wing conditions: â If you do not wan t to store the cleaning ta pe in a magazine slot after manually cleaning the tape dri ve. â If the cleaning tape has e xpired. A cleaning tape cartridge can be used for 20 cleanings. T o eject a cleaning tape: 1. On the main menu , scroll to Command. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Command submenu, scrol l to Cleaning T ape. 4. Press Enter . 5. Log in as Operator . 6. On the Cleaning T ape submen u, scroll to Eject Cleaning T ape. 7. Press Enter . The autolo ader ejects the cl eaning tape from the mailslot. T ape Driv e Cl eaning M ethods Y ou can clean your tape driv e in three ways: â Manual Cleaning â Auto Clean â Software Manual C leaning If neither Auto Clean nor the backup so ftwareâ s cleaning option are enabled and the dri ve requires cleaning, the autoloader displays a cle aning message on the LCD.
T ape Dr iv e Cleaning 12 3 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide Caution: Becau se the cleaning cartr idge is ab ra siv e, y ou should not u se it unless the cleaning message appears. T o clean the tape dri ve manually: 1. On the main menu , scroll to Command. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Command submenu, scrol l to Cleaning T ape. 4. Press Enter . 5. Log in as Operator . 6. On the Cleaning T ape submenu, scro ll to Load to Dri ve. 7. Press Enter . The autoloader mov es the cleaning tape fro m its slot to the tape dri ve and then cleans the driv e with it. When the cleaning is finished, you must return the cleaning tape to its magazine slot. 8. On the main menu , scroll to Command. 9. Press Enter . 10. On the Command submenu, scrol l to Cleaning T ape. 11. Press Enter . 12. Log in as Operator . 13. On the Cleaning T ape submen u, scroll to Unload from Dri ve. 14. Press Enter . The autolo ader remov es the clea ning tape from the tape dr i ve. 15. When you ha ve finished manually cleaning the tape dri ve, do one of the follo wing: â Store it to its magazine slot (see âStoring the Cleaning T apeâ). â Eject the cleaning tape from the auto loader (see âEjecting the Cleaning Ta p e â ) .
T ape Dr iv e Cleaning 12 4 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Auto C le an Note: Aut o Clean is not support e d on W i ndo ws 2000 r emov able st orag e. The Auto Clean function permits the auto loader to perform the cleaning pro c ess automatically without interrupting normal operation. The Auto Clean feature is turned of f by default. W ith Auto Clean enabled, the autoloader monitors the cleaning requirements of the tape driv e. When the driv e indicates a Cleaning Required status, the autoloader automatically remov es the cleaning cartrid ge from its slot and i nserts it into the tape dri ve. After completing the cleanin g c y cle, the autoloader returns the cleaning cartridge to its slot. When Auto Clean is enabled, the autoload er automatically cleans the tape dri ve when a Cleaning Required s tatus occurs . During the cleaning cycle, the LCD displays messages indicating the pro gress of the process: â Loading Cleaning Cartridge. The autoload er is loading the cleaning cartridge from its magazine slot into the t a pe dri ve. â Cleaning Dri ve. The cleaning cartridge is running in the tape dri ve. â Unloading Cleaning Cartridge. The autolo ader is returning the cleaning tape to its magazine slot. Note: If yo u enable Aut o Clean, mak e sur e th e clea ning opt ion in y our ba ck up softw are is tur ned off . Before you enable the Auto Clean option, you must desi gnate which slot contains the cleaning cartridge and load the cleaning cartridge into that slot. If you hav e not done this, the autoloader will not allow you to enable Auto Clean. T o set Auto Clean: 1. On the main menu, scroll to Conf iguration. 2. Press Enter . 3. On the Conf iguration submen u, scroll to Cleaning T ape. 4. Press Enter . 5. Log in as Administration.
T ape Dr iv e Cleaning 12 5 S SL101 6 T ape A utoloader Ref erence Gui de 6. On the Cleaning T ape submen u, scroll to Au to Clean On/Off. If Auto Clean is enabled, the menu ite m appears as Auto Clean O n. If Auto Clean is disabled, it appears as Auto Clean Off. 7. T o change the settin g, press the up or do wn scroll ke y once. 8. Press Enter . Soft w are Set the cleaning option in your software ap pli cation (if av ailable) so that the software monitors dri ve cleaning. If your application software supports automatic cleaning, store a cleaning cartridge in the slot specif ied by the application. Note: If aut omatic cleaning is enab led in y our appli cation softwar e, mak e sur e the Auto Clean option is d isabled on the aut olo ader either vi a the L CD fr ont pan el or W eb Adm ini stration.
T ape Dr iv e Cleaning 12 6 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e
12 7 SSL1016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide 6 T r oubl eshooting Befor e Contac ting T ec hnical Suppor t Before you contact technical su pport, use th e information in this chapter to try and resolve the problem. Problems with the autoloader ca n occur in the following forms: â Operational Problems â Error Messages Operational Pr oble ms Operational problems can range from co mpatibility issues wi th the operating system to failure of the front panel. Ta b l e 1 3 describes the probable cause and suggested action for each opera tional problem you may encounter . T able 13: Sugg ested Actions for Operational Pr obl ems Problem Probable Cause Suggested Actio n F r ont P anel doe s not displa y inf ormation . The connecti on to the LC D h a s f a i l e d . Use the W eb Adm in ist r at ion tool to tr oubleshoot the err or . The a utoloader did not po wer up . See, â Autoloader does no t po wer up . â Th e L CD ha s failed . R eplace the cha ssis assembly . Aut oloader is operating slo wl y . The au toloader is inco rr ect ly con fi gur ed f or the oper a ting sys te m. Go to the HP su pport web site fo r compatibility r e quirements: http: //www .hp .com Dr iv e is oper ating slo wl y . Dr iv e head is dirty . If the c leaning light is also on, clean th e dr iv e. Media is w orn o ut . T ry a ne w ta pe and discar d the older me dia .
Tr o u b l e s h o o t i n g 12 8 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Back up se r ve r isn't capabl e of sendi ng data to the dr ive f ast enough. F or the SDL T and Ultr ium dr iv es, the ba ck up serv er n e e d s to h av e lo t s o f me m o r y , pr ocessing po wer , a dedicated S CSI bus and a f ast fi l e s yst e m. Ne tw or k is su es . Mo st ne tw or k s ar en 't c ap ab le of sending data fast enough to the SDL T and Ultr ium dri ves. Ther efor e mu ltiple network s treams of data mu st be used f or bac k ups (concur rency .) Also look for high ne t wor k tr affi c, whi ch can aff e ct ba ck up/r esto re perf or mance . S CSI issues. Check t erminatio n, and cable length. Use L VDS SCSI and don't connect an y Single -Ended devi ces or terminat ors on the sam e bus as the autoloader . Ul tr a 160 is r ecom mended f or Ultrium 2 perf or mance . Back up so ft w are isn't conf igur ed optimally . Make sur e that the back up softwar e is c onf igured f or the best p erfo rmance . (Bloc k siz e at 64 and tur n softwar e compr essi on off). Data set is impairing perf or mance . Th e foll ow ing can lo w er perf ormance: l ots of small (<64k) f iles , fr agmen tatio n, and uncompr essible data . Re a l T i me C l o ck ke ep s g e t t i n g res e t / c l e a re d. Th e DL T1 and SDL T autolo ader versions cannot maintain the clock when power i s of f . Since the DL T1 and SDL T ver sio n s c a n n ot m ai nt ai n po wer to t he clock w hen pow er i s off or the autoloader is r eset, it is r ecommended to conf igur e these autol oaders to connect to a time serv er instead of manually setting the clock. T able 13: Sugg ested Actions for Operational Pr obl ems Problem Probable Cause Suggested Actio n
Tro u b l e s h o o t i n g 12 9 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Err or M essages Failures can occur while operating the au toloader . They pre v ent the autoloader from completing a specif ic ac tion. When a failure occurs , tw o things can happen: â No error message appears, but the autolo ader fails to complete the action. If no message appears, you will need to call a serv ice representati ve to troubleshoot the proble m. â An error message appears on the front panel or W eb Administration. If an error message appears, follo w the procedures listed in Ta b l e 1 4 to try and resolve the problem. Aut oloader does not pow er up . The powe r c ord o r sour ce is malfuncti oning or the autolo ader is inc orr ec tly conf igur ed. Chec k all outlets and po wer cor ds for pr oper connecti on. The power switc h on the back of th e autoloader is set to 0. F lip the pow er switc h on the back of the au toloader back to the | po sition and , if necessary , pre ss the pow er button on the fr ont o f the autoloader . Th e DCA is not f ully seated . Re se a t t h e D C A t o e n s ure a good connecti on to the chassis asse mbly . T able 13: Sugg ested Actions for Operational Pr obl ems Problem Probable Cause Suggested Actio n
Tr o u b l e s h o o t i n g 130 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Understanding Error Messag es When a failure f irst occurs , a two-digit error message appears on the front panel of the autoloader . See Ta b l e 1 4 for the error descriptio n and su ggested repair . When vie wing the error log fro m the front panel, the te xt that appears is similar to the follo wing: Task: Picker Error: 02b9202f Contxt: 03ac/00400100 POC: 00022 POH: 00000:07:41: #14 Find the eight characters following âError:â in the second line of the block of text. The third and fourth digits are the error code. In the example abov e, the error code is b9. In Ta b l e 1 4 , you will see that this is an error ev ent related to the picker . Note: POH is the time of t he err or w i th an a ssigned number . The higher t he err or number is, the mor e r ecent it is. If you need to vie w an error log from W eb Administrator , the text that appears is similar to the follo wing: 0014: PC: 00022 POH: 00000 : 0 7 : 41 Error: 02b9202f, Context: 03ac/00400100 070d02c7 : a70dfd3a : 0708000 a : 00000000 00000000 : 00000000 : 0000000 0 : 00000000 00000000 : 00000000 : 0000000 0 : 00000000 Find the eight characters follo wing âError:â in the first line of the block of text. The third and fourth digits are the error code. In the example abov e, the error code is b9. In Ta b l e 1 4 , you will see that this is an error ev ent related to the picker .
Tro u b l e s h o o t i n g 131 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide . T able 14 : Err or M essages Err or M essage Description Suggested Repa ir 00 - 25 Gener al softwar e fla gs â P ower cy cle the autoloader and r un the Heal th test . â Check HP w ebsite for f irm war e updates . 26 M e s s a g e S e n d I D err or â Check S CSI Bus ca bles and ter minators . â Make sur e the host bus adapter is installed , detected , and configur ed proper ly . â P ow er cyc l e au toloader . Repeat checks afte r pow er cycle . 2 7 Message bad â Check S C SI bus c ables and terminators. â Make sur e the host bus adapter is installed , detected , and configur ed proper ly . â P ow er cyc l e au toloader . Repeat checks afte r pow er cycle . 28 Message parameter bad â Che ck host device d r iver . â Make sur e the softwar e appli cation is supported , has the autoloader corr e ctly conf igured, and has the latest p atc h es install ed. â Check S C SI bus c ables and terminators. â Make sur e the host bus adapter is installed , detected , and configur ed proper ly . â P ow er cyc l e au toloader . Repeat checks afte r pow er cycle . 29 In vali d element â Che ck host device d r iver . â Make sur e the softwar e appli cation is supported , has the autoloader corr e ctly conf igured, and has the latest p atc h es install ed. â P ow er cyc l e au toloader . Repeat checks afte r pow er cycle .
Tr o u b l e s h o o t i n g 13 2 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e 2A In vali d element statu s â Che ck host device d r iver . â Make sur e the softwar e appli cation is supported , has the autoloader corr e ctly conf igured, and has the latest p atc h es install ed. â P ow er cyc l e au toloader . Repeat checks afte r pow er cycle . 2B- 2F F irm war e tables and stacks in vali d â P ower cy cle the autoloader and r un the Heal th test . â Update firm war e. â Change positi on of the f irm war e jumper t o enable secondary f irmw ar e i mage: 1. R emov e the DCA. (See Appendi x D for instru ctions.) 2 . Change the jumpers on the fr ont of the D CA fr om v ertical to hor i zon tal or hor iz ont al to ver t ic al. 3 . Install th e DCA. 4. P o wer on the autoloader and, if necessar y , attempt a f irm war e upgrade . 30 P ost F ailure â V erify th at the DC A and magazines ar e properl y seated . â P ower cy cle the autoloader . 31 - 38 S yste m Monitor ing ty pe e v en ts â P ower cy cle the autoloader and r un the Heal th test . â Check HP w ebsite for f irm war e updates . 39 O ff l i n e N o a c ti o n re q ui red . 3A Door loc ked No ac tion r equir ed. 3B Open fr ont â Install maga zine or maga zine bla nk . â T ry a differ ent magazine or magazine blank. T able 14 : Err or M essages Err or M essage Description Suggested Repa ir
Tro u b l e s h o o t i n g 13 3 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 3C Ov er tem p â V erif y that room temperature is w i thin specif ications. â Check that the re is adequate c learance for airf low . â Clear debr i s f rom an y op enings of the aut oloader , both in the fron t a nd the back. â V erify t hat both f a ns ar e wo rking . If fans ar e bad, contact HP cu stomer supp ort . â P ower off the autoloader and allow it to co ol . 3D Dr ive er r or T r y a differ ent piece of media . If that a lso f ai ls, contac t HP cu stomer suppo rt. 3E Load err or â V erify y ou ar e using the cor rect ty pe of media . â V erify cartr idge doe s not hav e labels or oth er matter placed an ywher e on the cartr idge e xcept whe re la bels are e xpected to be pla c ed . â T ry to load a differ ent pi e ce of media . If multiple pi eces of media f ail, con tact HP cu stomer su pport. 3F Unload er ro r â V erify cartr idge doe s not hav e labels or oth er matter placed an ywher e on the cartr idge e xcept whe re la bels are e xpected to be pla c ed . â T ry to load a differ ent pi e ce of media . If multiple pi eces of media f ail, con tact HP cu stomer su pport. 60 - 6 9 Internal com mu nica tion eve nt s P ower cy cle the autoloader . A0 - A4 P ic ker servo er r ors â Ru n Pic ke r te s t. â R u n Health test . â If pr oblem continues, po wer cy cle the au toloader and r epe at the tests . T able 14 : Err or M essages Err or M essage Description Suggested Repa ir
Tr o u b l e s h o o t i n g 134 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide A5 Source element empty â V erify that the e xpected sour ce r e all y does hav e a cartri dge. â R u n the He alth test. â If the sour ce is a magazine , replace the cartr idge in that slot w i th a differ ent cartr idge and try aga in . If e rro r c o nt i n u e s, re p l a c e t h e ma g a z i n e. â If sour ce is the t ape dri v e, v er ify the ta pe dri ve ha s a cartri dge and it w as ejec ted. â P ower cy cle the autoloader . â If err or continues , contact HP customer support . A6 Source magazine missing â V erify the magazine is in stalled corr ectly into the autoloader . â Rem ove and insert the magazine again. â R u n the He alth test. â T ry a differ ent magazine or magazine blank. â P ower cy cle the autoloader . â R eplace the magazine . A7 Destinati on maga z ine missing â V erify the magazine is in stalled corr ectly into the autoloader . â Rem ove and insert the magazine again. â R u n the He alth test. â T ry a differ ent magazine or magazine blank. â P ower cy cle the autoloader . â R eplace the magazine . T able 14 : Err or M essages Err or M essage Description Suggested Repa ir
Tro u b l e s h o o t i n g 13 5 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide A8 Dest ination element ful l â V erify the e xpe ct e d destination really does not have a cartr id ge. â If destination is a maga zine, install and r emov e a cartri dge fr om the selected slot and try again. If e rro r c o nt i n u e s, re p l a c e t h e ma g a z i n e. â If desti nation is the tape d r iv e ver ify the tape dri ve does not have a cartridge . â If a cartri dge is in the mailslot opening , rem ov e it and ve rify that the mailslot door is closed . â P ower cy cle the autoloader . â Set the autoloa der to Ho me us ing W eb Adminis trati on , Command page. â R u n the He alth test. â If err or continues , contact HP customer support . A9 P ic ker f ull â Look in the fr ont of the autoloader and con f i rm the picker i s ful l. â P ower cy cle the autoloader . â R u n the He alth test. â Set the autoloa der to Ho me us ing W eb Adminis trati on , Command page. â Contact HP c ustomer support if the pr oblem continues and pr e vents normal oper ations . AA P ic ker cartr idge sensor err or â Pe r f o r m p i c k e r t e s t . â P erf orm the Health test . â If problem pre vents th e test fr om runn ing, contact HP cu stomer suppo rt. AB Dr iv e path senso r err or â R u n the He alth test. â P ower cy cle the autoloader . A C Mai l slot do or sen sor err or â In sert a ca rtridge i nto th e autolo ader vi a the mai l slot . â P ower cy cle the autoloader . T able 14 : Err or M essages Err or M essage Description Suggested Repa ir
Tr o u b l e s h o o t i n g 13 6 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e AD Mail slot sol enoid err or â In sert a ca rtridge i nto th e autolo ader vi a the mai l slot . â P ower cy cle the autoloader . AE Unkno wn serv o err or R u n the He alth test. AF Er ror l og inf ormati on eve nt No acti on r equir ed. B 0 - B F E rro r ev en t s re l a te d to th e picker n ot rot a t i n g o r tr anslating corr ectl y . â R u n the Pi cker test . â R u n the He alth test. â P ower cy cle the autoloader . C0 Unkno wn mot or err or â R u n the He alth test. â P ower cy cle the autoloader . D0 Ma ga zi ne solenoid bad â Re move a nd i n se r t e a ch m a gaz i ne. â T ry a differen t magazine, if possible . â P ower cy cle the autoloader . D1 Maga zine pr esent sensor bad â Re move a nd i n se r t e a ch m a gaz i ne. â T ry a differen t magazine, if possible . â P ower cy cle the autoloader . T able 14 : Err or M essages Err or M essage Description Suggested Repa ir
Tro u b l e s h o o t i n g 13 7 S SL1 016 T ape Au toloader R efer ence Guide If you still hav e a question after reading this guide, see âGetting Help, â in the preface. D2 - D4 P osition se nsor bad â Re move a nd i n se r t e a ch m a gaz i ne. â T ry a differen t magazine, if possible . â P ower cy cle the autoloader . D5 - DE Cartri dge flags located on the maga z ine ma y be bad or the sensor to detect the flag s m a y have a pr oblem â Re move a nd i n se r t e a ch m a gaz i ne. â T ry a differen t magazine, if possible . â P ower cy cle the autoloader . DF Jammed cartr id ge â Look thr ough the mail slot door and ver ify a cartr i dge is j ammed . If a cartr idg e is jamm ed, pow er cyc le the autoloader . â If a cartri dge is still jammed , pow er down and unplug the aut olo ader . R e mo ve the opp osite maga z ine that is jammed. Car efull y try to push th e cartr idg e forw ar d into th e maga zine slot . T her e may be a need to slightly r otate the pick er to get the cartri dge to mov e forwar d . P ow er back up , install the remo ved maga z ine and run the H ealth test. â If the cartr idge cannot be unj ammed, r emo ve the S CSI, Ethe rnet , and pow er cabl es fr om the autol o ader and r emov e the au toloader fr om the cabinet . With the autoloader r esting flat on a table , remov e the top c over and sl ide or remove the jammed c artri dge. R e assemble the autoloader and pri or to reinstalling the autoloader in th e cabinet , run t he He al th te st from t he front pa nel. â If the same cartr idge jams , r emo ve it fr om the s ystem a s a bad cartr idge . V er ify ther e ar e no fore ig n l abe ls o r st ickers on the ca rtridg e. â If the au toloa der a lw ays ja ms g oing to or fr om the same magazine , replace the maga zine. â If jam is random , contact HP customer support . T able 14 : Err or M essages Err or M essage Description Suggested Repa ir
Tr o u b l e s h o o t i n g 138 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Diagnostic T ests Ta b l e 1 5 lists the diagnostic tests. T able 15: Diagnostic T ests Te s t Description Halt Cance ls any c urr en tly r unning tes t. Self â Checks the abilit y of the pi cker to pr operl y r otate and tr anslate . â V er ifi es that installe d magazine s functi on cor rectl y . Health â Ve r i f i e s p i c k e r m o v e m e n t . â V erif ies magazine mo vement . â Updates i n ventory . â V erif ies a bility to mov e cartr idge to and f rom eac h magazine element. â V er ifi es dri ve co mmunicati on and ab ility to mo ve a cartri dge to and fr om the dr iv e. â V erif ies that a cartr idge can be mov e d to and fr om the mail slot . Pic k e r â P erfor ms a full p ick er tr anslation calibr ati on. â P erfor ms a full p ick er r ota tion calibr ation . Mag az ine â P erforms left and ri ght magazine calibration. â V er ifies su ccessful sl ot mov emen t. In ven tory T ake s a snapsho t of the c urr ent la bels r ecor ded for ea ch cartr idg e pr esent , t hen perf orms an d inv ent ory and comp are s the new results to the snaps hot . Dr iv e Read/W r ite P erfor ms a wr ite of two f ull trac ks of data foll owed b y a r e ad and if t he dr iv e is capabl e perfo rms a com par e on the dat a. V erif ies the w rite/r ead statisti cs to determine if ther e is a wr ite or r ead problem w ith the dr iv e. Caution: R un ning this test may ov er wr ite ex isti ng data on the tape . Do not us e a tape cont aining curr ent or c riti cal data.
139 S SL101 6 T ape A utoloader Ref erence Gui de A Reg ula tor y C omp li an ce Notices F ed er al Communications Commission Notice Part 15 of the Federal Communica tions Commission (FCC) Rules and Regulations has established Radio Frequenc y (RF) emission limits to provide an interference-free radio frequenc y spectrum . Many electr onic devices, including computers, generate RF energ y inc ident al to their intended function and are, therefore, cov ered by these rules. These rules place computers and related peripheral de vices into two classes, A and B, d epending upon their intended installation. Class A de vices are those th at may reasonably be e xpected to be installed in a b u siness or commercial en vironment. Class B de vices are those that may reasonably b e e xpe cted to be insta lled in a residential en vironment (that is, personal computers). The FCC requires de vices in both classes to bear a label indicating the interference potential of th e de vice as well as additional operating instructions for the user . The rating label on the de vice shows which cl ass (A or B) the equipment falls into. Class B de vices hav e an FCC logo or FCC ID on the label. Class A de vices do not hav e an FCC logo or FCC ID on the la bel. Once the class of the de vice is determined, refer to the follo wing correspon ding statement. Class A Equipment This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to P a rt 15 of th e FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harm ful interference when the equipment is operated in a comme rcial en vironment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency ener gy and, if no t installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful in terference to radi o communications. Operation of this equipment in a resi dential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at personal expense.
Regula tory Com pliance Notice s 140 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Class B Equipm ent This equipmen t has been tested and fo und to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to P a rt 15 of th e FCC Rules. These limits are designed to pro vide reasonable protection ag ainst harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energ y and, if not installed and used in accordance with th e instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio co mmunicati ons. Howe ver , there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmfu l interference to radio or tele vision reception, which can be determined by turning the equipmen t of f and on, the user is en couraged to try to correct the interference b y one or more of the following measures: â Reorient or relocate the recei ving antenna. â Increase the separa tion between the equipment and recei ver . â Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit dif ferent from that to which the recei ver is co nnected. â Consult the dealer or an e xperienced ra dio or televi sion technician for help. Mod ifi cat ions The FCC requires the user to be notified th at any changes or mod ifications made to this de vice that are not e xpressly approved by Hewlett-P ackard Company may vo id the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables Connections to this de vice must be made with shielded cables with metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods in order to ma intain compliance wi th FCC Rules and Regulations.
Regula tory Compliance Noti ces 141 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Dec lar ation of Conformity for produc ts mark ed with th e FCC logo - United States only This de vice complies with P art 15 of th e FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the follo wing two conditions: (1) this de vice may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this de vic e must accept any interferenc e recei ved, including interference that may cause und esired operation. For questions re garding this FCC declaration, contact: He wlett-Packard Company Regulatory Engineer , MS E-200 825 14th S treet S.W . Lov eland, CO 8053 7 Or , call (970) 898-1738 T o identify this product, refer to the Pa rt, Series, or Model number found on the product. Canadian Notice (Av is Canadien) Class A Equipment This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Eq uipment Regul ations. Cet appareil numérique de la classe A resp ecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada. Class B Equipm ent This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Eq uipment Regul ations. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B re specte toutes les ex igences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
Regula tory Com pliance Notice s 14 2 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Eur opean Union Notice Products bear ing the CE marking comply with the EMC Directiv e (89/336/EEC) and the L ow V oltage Directi ve (73/23 /EEC ) issued by the Co mmission of the European Community and if this product has telecommunicatio n functionality , the R&TTE Directi ve (1999/5/EC). Compliance with these directi ves implies conformity to the following European Norms (in parentheses are the equi valent international standa rds and re gulations): â EN 55022 (CISPR 22) - El ectromagnetic Interference â EN55024 (IEC61000 -4-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 11) - Electromag n etic Immunity â EN61000-3-2 (IE C61000-3-2) - Po wer Line Harmonics â EN61000-3-3 (IE C61000-3-3 ) - Po wer Line Flicker â EN 60950 (IEC 60950) - Prod uct Safety BSM I No ti ce
Regula tory Compliance Noti ces 143 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Japanese Notice
Regula tory Com pliance Notice s 144 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e
14 5 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide B Elec trostatic Discharge T o prev ent damage to the system, be a ware of the precautions you need to follow when setting up the system or handling part s. A discharge of stat ic electricity from a f i nger or other conductor ma y damage system boards or oth er static-sensiti ve de vices. This type of damage may reduce the life expectanc y of the de vice. T o prev ent electrostatic damage, observe the following precautions: â A v oid hand contact by transp orting and storing products in static-safe containers. â K eep electrostatic-sensitiv e parts in their containers until the y arriv e at static-free workstations. â Place parts on a grounded surface before removing them from their containers. â A void touching pins, leads, or circuitry . â Alway s be properly grounded when touching a static-sensiti ve co mponent or assembly .
Electr ost atic Disc harge 146 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Gr ounding M et hods There are sev eral methods for grounding. Use one or more of the following methods when handling or installin g electrostatic-sensiti ve parts: â Use a wrist strap connected b y a ground cord to a grounded workstation or computer chassis. Wrist straps are fl e xible straps with a minimum of 1 megohm ± 10 percent resistance in th e ground cords. T o provide proper grounding, we ar the strap snug against the skin. â Use heel straps, toe straps, or boot straps at standing workstations. W ear the straps on both feet when stand ing on conducti ve floors or dissipating floor mats. â Use conducti ve f ie ld service tools. â Use a portable f ield service kit with a folding static-dissipating work mat. If you do not have an y of th e suggested equip ment for proper grounding , ha ve an authorized reseller install the part. Note: F or more infor mation on static electr ic it y , or for assistance with pr o duct installation , contact y our autho ri z ed re seller .
14 7 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide C Spec ifications Ph ysical Specifications P er f ormance Spec ifications T able 16 : Phy sical Specifications Height 3 .5 inches (8.8 9 cm) Wid th 17 .6 inches ( 4 4.7 0 cm) Length 2 7 .6 7 inch es ( 7 0.2 8 cm) W eight ( w ithout media) 50 l b (22 .68 kg) T able 17 : P erformance Specifications Initializ e el ement status 90 second s (typical) Mean cartr idge cy cle time 20 seconds Mean cartr idge loa d time 10 seconds Av g load time (af ter placing cartridge in driv e) 5 9 sec on ds (t ypica l) Max transfer rate DL T1: 3 MB/sec (nati ve) SDL T 320: 16 MB/sec (nati ve) Ultr ium 460: 30 MB/sec (nativ e) Maximum Storage Capacit y DL T1: 12 80 GB (comp re ssed) SDL T 320: 5120 GB (comp ressed) Ultr ium 460: 6400 GB (compr essed) Note: Assumes typ ical 2:1 com pr ession of dat a. Actu al compr ession ma y vary , depending on t ype of data be ing bac ked u p.
Spe cification s 148 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e P ow er Spec ifications T able 18: P o wer Spec ifications Li ne V o lt ag e 6 0 H z sys te m : 90 to 2 65 V A C; 50 H z syst em : 90 to 135 V A C Li ne fre q ue nc y 4 7 Hz to 6 3 Hz AC input curr ent 60 Hz s ystem : 6 .0A (RMS) f or 115V A C; 50 H z syst em : 3. 0 A (RMS) for 2 30V A C P o wer consump tion 60 Hz s ystem : 7 5W ; 50 H z syst em : 80 W Line discontinuities: V oltage surges /- 500 v olts at nominal line vo ltage P ulse w idt h: 100 ns R ise Time: 5 ns R epetition Ra te: 1 Hz Commo n and diff er enti al mode, po sitiv e and negative polar i ty Line discontinuities: V oltage spikes /- 1. 5 kV at n ominal line v olt age P ulse Wi dth: 1 micr osecond R ise Time: 25 ns R epetition r ate: 1 Hz Commo n and diff er enti al mode, po sitiv e and negative polar i ty
Spe cification s 14 9 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide En vir onm ental Specifications Acoustic and Noise L imits T able 19: Env ironmental Specifications T emperature R ang e (Dry Bulb) Oper ating 10ºC to 35ºC ( 5 0 ºF to 9 5ºF) Non-oper ating - 35ºC t o 65ºC (-31ºF t o 1 4 9ºF) T emperature V ariation Oper ating 10ºC (50ºF) per hour Non- Oper ating 20ºC (68ºF) per hour Humidity Oper ating 20% to 80% non-condensing Non- Operating 10 % to 90% non- condensing Gr ad ien t 10% per hour W et Bulb Oper at ing 2 6ºC ( 7 8.8ºF) m ax Non-Operating 29ºC (84.2ºF ) max Altitude Oper ating -500 to 10, 000 feet (-15 2 to 3, 048 meter s) Non-Operating -500 t o 30, 000 feet (-15 2 to 9 ,144 meters) T able 20: Aco ustic and Noise Limits Specifica tion Operating Storage or Non-operating T ransportat ion Acou stics Idle: not to e xceed 5 5 dbA F ull oper ation: no t to e xceed 60 dB A N/A N/A
Spe cification s 150 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e Safety and Regulatory The autoloader carries the follo wing Re gulatory Agency product safety certifi c ations. T able 21: Regulator y and Product Safet y Certifications Descripti on Specification UL L i sted Mar k UL 195 0 (standard f or safety of inf ormati on technology equipment) TUV GS Mark (Ge rman y) E N609 50, IE C95 0 (standard f or safety of info rmation tec hnology equipment thir d edition) CE Marking (E u r opean Union) Lo w V oltage Direc tive , 7 2/2 3/EEC, Eur opean Union CUL Mark (Canadi an UL) CAN/C SA 2 2 .2 No . 95 0 (standard f or safe t y of info rmation tec hnology equipment) R e gulat ory Ser ies ID Number ED2000, Class B
151 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide D Upgr ading or Replacing t he DCA This appendix describes ho w to upgrade or replace the driv e carrier assembly (DCA). Configuration and T ools If you replace or upgrade the autoloader DCA, you need to check settings for the DCA and the SCSI b us. Y ou will need a Phillips scre wdriv er to replace a DCA. Remo v ing a DCA Before you replace the autoloader DCA, yo u must mak e sure the tape dri ve does not contain a cartridge. T o unload a tape from the tape dri ve, see âMo ve a Single Cartridgeâ or âEject a Sing le Cartridgeâ in Chapter 4. Y ou must also turn of f power to the auto loader and disconnect the po wer and SCSI cables from the back of the DCA. Caution: Th e DCA contains e lectroni c sensitiv e components. Be sur e to w ear your wr i st g r o und strap wh enever ha ndl in g th e DC A.
Upgrading or Replac i ng the DCA 15 2 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e T o re move th e D CA : 1. Po wer off the autoloader . 2. Disconnect all cords and cables from the back of the DCA. 3. Remov e the four screws anchoring the DCA to the chassis. Figur e 90: Removi ng t he screw s o n the rear of the c hassis
Upgr ading or Repl acing the DCA 15 3 S SL101 6 T ape A utoloader Ref erence Gui de 4. W ith one hand, grasp the DCA handle an d slide it backward to remo ve. Being careful not to touch the exposed board on the bottom of the DCA, place your other hand under the DCA to supp ort it and prev ent it from falling. Figur e 91: Removing the DCA Caution: A v oid t ouching t he expo sed board on the bottom o f the DCA. See Fi g u r e 92 .
Upgrading or Replac i ng the DCA 154 SSL1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide Figur e 92: Bottom of DCA
Upgr ading or Repl acing the DCA 15 5 S SL101 6 T ape A utoloader Ref erence Gui de Installing a DCA T o install a DCA: 1. Put on gr ound wrist strap and co nnect to appropriate ground . 2. Grasp the DCA by the handle with on e hand and support it undernea th with the other hand. Caution: A v oid t ouching th e expos ed PCB A on the bott om of the DCA. 3. Slide the DCA into the DCA bay 1 . Make sure you position DCA corr ectly; it should slide smoothly . Figur e 93: Installing the DCA 4. Install the four scre ws that secure the DCA to the chassis 2 . T ighten firmly . 5. Make sure the po wer switch on the back of the DCA is off (t he 0 is pressed), then connect the power cord and SCSI cable. 6. On the power switch on the back of the DCA, press th e | to po wer on the autoloader . 1 2 2
Upgrading or Replac i ng the DCA 15 6 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Guid e
15 7 S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide index Index Index A altitude 149 authorized reseller, HP 13 auto clean 124 autoloader front view 15 internal view 20 IP address 47 rear view 18 status 89 status messages 90 C cartridges ejecting 80 inserting into mailslot 78 inserting single 77 moving 79 using 77 cleaning auto 124 manual 12 2 cleaning tape ejecting 122 inserting 120 storing 120 configuration menu 41 control mode, setting 44 conventions document 10 equipment symbols 11 text symbols 10 cooling fans 18 D daisy chaining 38 date, setting 55 DCA described 20 installing 155 removing 151 replacing 151 default password 76 , 100 document conventions 10 E element st atus 92 equipment symbols 11 error messages 129 Ethernet configurin g 47 connector 19 view information 95 ethernet connection 38 European Union Notice 142
Inde x 15 8 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Gui de F fans, cooling 18 firmware updating 97 view version 91 front panel components 73 default password 76 function keys 16 , 73 G getting help 13 H handles, rackmount, installing 30 height rackmount 147 help, obtaining 13 HP authorized reseller 13 storage website 13 technical support 13 humidity 149 I installation location 25 preparatio n 23 rackmount 27 SCSI bus requirements 23 standalone 34 verification 40 IP address dynamic, setting 48 setting permanent 49 IP gateway 50 L LCD 16 , 74 LEDs defined 74 status 17 length rackmount 147 logout 76 M magazine changing orientation 87 illustrated 17 installing 83 unloading 81 mailslot described 16 inserting cartridg e 78 P password default 76 , 100 lost 59 setting 57 performance problems 127 picker 20 power AC plug 18 switch 17 switching on 38 R rack stability, warning 12
Inde x S S L1016 T ape Autoloader R efer ence Guide 15 9 S SCSI bus require ments 23 cabl e requiremen ts 24 connection 36 connector 19 ID setting 42 switch 42 terminator requ irements 24 security, configuring 56 sequential mode operation 46 set compression 96 , 97 SNMP server 51 status information 88 subnet mask 49 symbols in text 10 symbols on equipment 11 T tape cartri dges inspecting 63 protecting 67 storing 68 transporting 68 tape drive cleaning 122 status 93 version 94 technical support, HP 13 temperature non-operating 149 operating 149 text symbols 10 time server 52 time, changing 53 time, setting 55 U updating firmware 97 W warning rack stability 12 symbols on equipment 11 Web Administration accessing 99 default password 100 websites HP storage 13 weight rackmount 147 width rackmount 147 write-protect sw itch 69
Inde x 160 S SL1016 T ape A utoloa der Re fer ence Gui de